1
第一主题
高中英语语法系统全解（一）
第1 章 动词时态 2-4
楼 第2 章 被动语态 5-7
楼
第3 章 虚拟语气 9-11
楼第4 章 情态动词 12-16
楼
第5 章 动词不定式 17-20
楼第6 章 动词的ing 形式 21-24
楼
第7 章 过去分词 25-27
楼第8 章 独立主格结构 28
－30 楼
第9 章 名词性从句 31
－33 楼第10 章 定语从句 35
－40 楼
第11 章 状语从句（一） 40 －45 楼第11 章 状语从句（二）
第12 章 直接引语和间接引语第13 章 倒装
第14 章 强 调 第15 章 省略
第16 章 主谓一致
动词时态－－ 一般时
第一章 动词时态（一）
在英语中，不同时间发生的动作或存在的状态，要用不同的动词形式来表示，这就叫做
动词的时态。一、一般时
一般时包括一般现在时、一般过去时、一般将来时和一般过去将来时。
A.一般现在时
1 ． 一般现在时的构成
一般现在时主要用动词原形来表示。主语是第三人称单数时，动词后面要加-s 或-es。
They want good jobs.
他们想要好的工作。
The coat matches the dress.
外衣和裙子很相配。
This work does not satisfy me.
这项工作我不满意。
Do you understand?
你懂了吗?
2 ．一般现在时的用法
①一般现在时的基本用法
a. 表示现在习惯性的动作或存在状态
He always takes a walk after supper.
晚饭后他总是散散步。
Everyone is in high spirits now.
现在大家都情绪高涨。
b. 表示客观事实或普遍真理
The sun rises in the east and sets in the west.
太阳从东方升起在西方落下。
Sound travels faster through water than it does through air.
声音在水中的传播速度要比在空气中快。
Time and tide wait for no man.
时间不等人。
c. 表示主语的特征、能力和状态
This cloth feels soft.
这布摸上去很软。
I love classical music.
我喜欢古典音乐。
The President still seems able to find time to go fishing.
看来总统仍能有时间去钓鱼。
d. 表示按计划或安排将要发生的动作
The meeting begins at 7:00.
会议七点钟开始。
We leave here at 8:00 sharp.
我们八点整离开这里。
e. 在时间、条件、让步状语从句中表示将来动作
2
When you come next time, bring me some magazines.
你下次来时，给我带几本杂志。
If time allows, we shall go there tomorrow.
如果时间允许的话，我们明天去那里。
Whether he agrees or not, I will stay at home.
不管他同意与否，我都会待在家里。
②一般现在时的特殊用法
a. 用于新闻标题或图片说明中
China Declares Manned Spaceflight Successful
中国宣布载人航天飞行圆满成功
Laura Bush Arrives in Moscow
劳拉·布什抵达莫斯科
b. 用于体育运动、表演等实况报道中
Francis slips past, passes the ball to Yao Ming, who jumps, catches and shoots it
into the basket.
弗朗西斯穿过去，把球传给姚明，姚明跳起来，接住球投进篮里。
Now, look, I press the button and turn on the machine.
现在，看，我按下按扭，打开了这台机器。
c. 表示告诫或劝说
You mind your own business.
你不要管闲事！
If he does that again, he goes to prison.
如果他再那样的话，他就会进监狱的。
d. 表示现在瞬间的动作
Here comes the bus.
汽车来了。
There goes the bell.
铃响了。
B．一般过去时
1 ． 一般过去时的构成
一般过去时是用动词的过去式来表示。
His words fetched a laugh from all present.
他的话使在场的人都笑了。
I did not sleep well last night.
我昨晚没睡好。
Did you direct the tourist to the hotel?
你告诉这位游客去旅馆的路了吗？
2 ．一般过去时的用法
①一般过去时的基本用法
a. 表示过去某个特定时间发生的动作或存在的状态
He suddenly fell ill yesterday.
昨天他突然生病了。
The engine stopped because the fuel was used up.
发动机因燃料用光而停机了。
注意：
在一般过去时的句子中，通常都要有表示过去的时间状语。
【误】I visited the Palace Museum.（在没有上下文的情况下，应避免这样说）
【正】I visited the Palace Museum last year.
去年我参观过故宫博物院。
【正】I have visited the Palace Museum.
我参观过故宫博物院。
b. 表示过去经常发生的动作或存在的状态
I wrote home once a week at college.
3
我上大学时每周给家里写一封信。
He was already in the habit of reading widely in his boyhood.
他童年时就养成了广泛阅读的习惯。
提示：
表示过去的习惯性动作，除了用过去式外，还可以用used to 或would 来表示。
She used to study late into the night when she was in Senior Three.
她上高三时经常学习到深夜。
He would sit for hours doing nothing.
过去他常常一坐几个钟头什么事也不做。
c. 表示过去连续发生的一系列动作
She entered the room, picked up a magazine and looked through it carefully.
她走进房间，拿起一本杂志，认真地翻阅了起来。
The students got up early in the morning, did morning exercises and then read
English aloud in the open air.
学生们很早起床，做早操，然后在室外朗读英语。
d. 在时间、条件状语从句中表示过去将要发生的动作
We would not leave until the teacher came back.
老师回来我们才会离开。
She told me she would not go if it rained the next day.
她告诉我如果第二天下雨的话，她就不去了。
②一般过去时的特殊用法
a. 在虚拟语气中表示现在或将来时间的动作或状态
It's time we went.
是我们该走的时候了。
I wish I were twenty years younger.
但愿我年轻20 岁。
I would rather you didn't do anything for the time being.
我宁愿你暂时先不要采取什么措施。
b. 在口语中，一般过去时往往显示委婉客气。
I wondered if you could give me a hand.
我想请你帮个忙。
Might I come and see you tonight?
我想今晚来看你，好吗？
3．一般现在时和一般过去时的比较
一般现在时要和现在时间相联系，而一般过去时和说话的“现在”不相联系。
His father is a film director.
他父亲是电影导演。（他现在还是）
His father was a film director.
他父亲曾是电影导演。（他现在不是）
How do you like the novel?
你觉得这部小说怎么样？（还在看小说）
How did you like the novel?
你觉得这部小说怎么样？（已看完小说）
C ．一般将来时
1 ． 一般将来时的构成
一般将来时是由“will / shall + 动词原形”构成的。shall 只限于第一人称，主要见于英国
英语，现在的趋势是第一、二、三人称的单复数形式均用will 表示。在口语中，shall 和
will 常缩写成“'ll”，紧接在主语之后。其否定式shall not 和will not 常简略为shan't 和
won't。
I'll go and shut the door.
我去关门。
When will you know your exam results?
4
你什么时候能知道考试结果？
I can see you're busy, so I won't stay long.
我看得出你很忙，所以我不会呆太久的。
提示：在you and I 或both of us 等短语后，只用will，不用shall。
You and I will arrive there next Monday.
我和你下周一都要到达那里。
Both of us will graduate from middle school next year.
我们俩明年中学毕业。
2．一般将来时的用法
①表示将要发生的动作或存在的状态
I shall be free this afternoon.
我今天下午有空。
There'll be no chemistry classes tomorrow.
明天没有化学课。
They will probably go to Shanghai for their holiday.
他们可能去上海度假。
注意：
在口语中，常用will / shall + be doing结构来代替will / shall + 动词原形，以表示生动。
I'll be seeing a friend off at the airport.
我要去机场给一个朋友送行。
He'll be going with us tomorrow.
他明天和我们一起去。
②表示将要反复发生的动作
My uncle will come to see me every Saturday.
我叔叔每个星期六都会来看我。
The students will have five English classes per week this term.
本学期学生们每周要上五节英语课。
③表示同意或答应做某事
That bag looks heavy. I'll help you with it.
这个包看起来很重，我来帮你提。
I won't tell anyone what happened, I promise.
我保证不告诉别人所发生的事。
④表示一种倾向或推测
Flowers will die without water.
没有水花会枯死的。
Water will change into ice at 0 ℃.
水在零摄氏度就会结冰。
This will be your sister, I guess.
我猜想这是你姐姐。
3．一般将来时的常用结构
①用于“I expect, I'm sure, I think, I wonder + 宾语从句”中
Don't worry about the exam. I'm sure you'll pass.
不要担心这次考试，我确信你会通过的。
I wonder what will happen.
我不知道将会发生什么事。
I don't think the test will be very difficult.
我想这次测验不会太难。
②用于“祈使句 + and + 陈述句”中
Work hard and you will succeed.
如果你努力，就会成功的。
Go at once and you will see her.
马上去，你就会见到她了。
③与表示时间或条件的状语从句连用
5
I'll let you know as soon as he arrives.
他一到我就通知你。
If you ask him, he will help you.
如果你请他，他会帮助你的。
We shall go unless it rains.
除非下雨，否则我们是要去的。
4 ．将来时间的其他表达法
①be going to + 动词原形
“be going to+ 动词原形”这一结构常用于口语中。
a. 表示决定或打算要做某事
I'm going to buy a new coat this winter.
今年冬天我打算买一件新大衣。
Are you going to play basketball after class?
下课后你去打篮球吗？
He is going to be a doctor when he grows up.
他长大后要当医生。
What are you going to do today?
今天你打算做什么？
b. 表示有迹象即将要发生什么事
Look at those black clouds. It is going to rain.
瞧那乌云，天要下雨了。
The car is going to turn over.
汽车要翻了！
There is going to be a snowstorm.
将有一场暴风雪。
比较：
“be going to + 动词原形”与“will / shall + 动词原形”的区别
1 ．be going to通常表示很快就要发生的事，而will/shall 既可表示不久的将来，也可表
示长远的将来或不确定的将来。
She is going to get better.
她的病要好了。（有恢复健康的迹象）
She will get better.
她的病会好的。（认为最终会恢复健康的）
2 ．will 表示将来，通常是指事先无计划的意图，是临时决定的； be going to 则表示事
先有计划的意图，是经过考虑的。
— George phoned while you were out.
你外出的时候乔治打电话来的。
— Ok. I'll phone him back.
好的，我给他回电话。（临时决定）
— Matthew phoned while you were out.
你外出的时候马修打电话来了。
— Yes, I know. I'm going to phone him back.
是的，我知道了。我准备给他回电话。（早有安排）
但在正式文体中，要用will 来表示事先安排的动作。
The meeting will begin at 10:00 a.m..
会议将在10 点开始。
Coffee will be served from 9:30 from today onwards.
从今天起9:30 开始供应咖啡。
3．表示有迹象显示将要发生某一动作时，要用be going to，不用will 或shall。
I feel terrible. I think I'm going to be sick.
我觉得不舒服，我想我要生病了。
4 ．be going to 可用于条件句，表示将来时间，will 则不能。
If you are going to attend the meeting, you'd better leave now.
6
如果你要出席会议，你最好现在就动身。
②be + 动词的-ing 形式
“be + 动词的-ing 形式”表示根据现在的计划或安排，预期将会发生某事，这种安排不容
随意改变。在这一结构中，动词-ing 形式通常是表示位置转移的动词，如arrive, come, go,
leave, move, start, stay, get 以及eat, meet, see off, die 等，并与表示将来的时间状语
连用。如果没有时间状语，则所表示的动作有即将发生之意。
He is leaving for Xinjiang in a few days.
他几天后要动身去新疆。
I am dining out tonight.
今晚我将出去吃饭。
The plane is taking off soon.
飞机马上就要起飞了。
The old man is dying.
那位老人快要死了。
比较：
“be + 动词的-ing 形式”和“be going to + 动词原形”的异同
1 ．表示按计划发生的动作时，两者可互换。
We are moving to a new flat tomorrow.
我们明天就要搬到新房子里去了。
We are going to move to a new flat tomorrow.
我们明天就要搬到新房子里去了。
2 ．表示由于客观因素而产生的将来动作或状态时，用be going to 结构，不用be + 动
词的-ing 形式。
You are going to fall if you climb that tree.
如果你爬树的话，你会摔下来的。（不可说 You are falling if ...）
Be careful. You are going to break that chair.
当心！你会把那张椅子弄坏的。（不可说 You are breaking that chair）
③ be + 动词不定式
这一结构中的be，只有现在式 (am, is, are) 和过去式 (was, were) 两种形式。
a. 表示按计划或安排将要发生的动作
The highway is to be open to traffic in May.
这条公路将在五月份通车。
Am I to take over his work?
我是不是要接管他的工作？
b. 用于条件句中强调按计划或安排将要发生的动作
If we are to take the 5:00 train, we must leave now.
如果我们乘坐5 点的火车的话，那我们现在就得出发。
c. 表示命令或吩咐等。否定形式常表示“禁止”或“不许”。
You are to be back before 10 p.m..
你必须在10 点前回来。
You are not to go out alone at night.
晚上你不能单独出去。
比较：
“be + 动词不定式”与“be going to+ 动词原形”的区别
1 ．“be going to+ 动词原形”侧重说话人个人的意图和打算，“be + 动词不定式”侧重受
别人的指示或安排要做的事。
I'm going to try my best to write this article well.
我将尽力把这篇文章写好。
Am I to wait here till their arrival?
我要在这儿一直等到他们抵达吗？
2 ．表示由于客观因素或不受人控制的将要发生的动作时，只用“be going to+ 动词原
形”，不用“be + 动词不定式”。
It's going to rain.
7
天要下雨了。（不说It's to rain.）
Rachel is going to faint.
雷切尔要晕倒了。
④ 一般现在时
一般现在时可以用来表示将来时间，主要用法有：
a. 表示由于日历或时刻表的规定而固定不变的或比较不易变更的将来时间发生的动作。
Tomorrow is Friday.
明天是星期五。
What time does the next train leave for Paris?
下一班开往巴黎的火车几点出发？
b. 在时间状语从句或条件状语从句中，用一般现在时表示将来时间的动作或状态。
I'll give the book to you after I finish it.
我看完这本书就给你。
If he arrives, we must go and meet him at the railway station.
如果他到了，我们就得到火车站去接他。
c. 在hope, suppose 等后面的宾语从句中常用一般现在时表示将来动作或状态。
I hope all is well with him.
我希望他一切都好。
Suppse we go hiking tomorrow.
我们明天还是去远足吧。
D．一般过去将来时
1 ．一般过去将来时的构成
一般过去将来时是由“should/would + 动词原形”构成的。
He asked me yesterday when I should leave for Paris.
昨天他问我什么时候动身去巴黎。
They wanted to know how they would finish the homework earlier.
他们想知道怎样才能早一点儿完成家庭作业。
2 ．一般过去将来时的用法
一般过去将来时间的出发点是过去，即从过去某一时刻看以后要发生的动作和状态。
a. 一般过去将来时常用于间接引语中
He said they would arrange a party.
他说他们将安排一个晚会。
I asked if he would come and fix my TV set.
我问他是否来帮我修电视机。
b. 一般过去将来时可用来表示非真实的动作或状态
If I had a chance to study abroad, I would study at Cambridge University.
如果我有机会出国学习的话，我就会去剑桥大学。
I wish he would go with me to the cinema tonight.
今晚他能和我一起去看电影就好了。
3 ．过去将来时间其他表达法
a. was/were going to + 动词原形
He said that he was going to live in the country when he retired.
他说他退休后要住在农村。
They thought it was going to rain.
他们认为天要下雨了。
b. was/were + 动词的-ing 形式
Nobody knew whether the guests were coming.
没人知道客人们是否要来。
I was told that the train was leaving in a few minutes.
我被告知火车几分钟后就要开了。
c. was/were + 动词不定式
She said she was to clean the classroom after school.
8
她说她放学后要打扫教室。
It was reported that another bridge was to be built across the Yangtse River.
据报道长江上将要再建一座大桥。
提示：
“was/were going to +动词原形”或“was/were + 动词不定式完成式”可表示未能实现的
过去将来时间的动作。
Last Sunday we were going to visit the Great Wall, but it rained.
上星期天我们本想去游览长城的，但却下雨了。（没有去成）
I was to have helped with the performance, but I got flu the day before.
我是打算帮忙演出的，但前天我感冒了。（没有帮上忙）
d. was/were about to do
“was/were about to do”表示说话的瞬间就会发生的动作。
I felt something terrible was about to happen.
我觉得有可怕的事要发生了。
e. was/were on the point of doing
I'm glad you have come. I was on the point of calling you, but you've saved me
the trouble now. 很高兴你来了。我正准备给你打电话，现在你省去我这个麻烦了。
提示：
“be about to do ”和“be on the point of doing ”结构一般不与表示将来的时间状语连
用，但后面可以接when 引导的分句。
I was about to start when it suddenly began to rain.
我正要动身天突然下雨了。
二、进行时
进行时表示动作正在进行，这个动作是暂时的，也是未完成的。进行时包括现在进行时、
过去进行时和将来进行时。
A．现在进行时
1 ．现在进行时的构成
现在进行时是由“am, is, are +现在分词”构成的。
I'm reading the evening newspaper.
我正在看晚报。
Now it isn't snowing outside.
现在外面不在下雪。
Are they playing soccer in the playground?
他们正在操场上踢足球吗？
2．现在进行时的用法
①现在进行时的基本用法
a. 表示说话的此刻正在进行的动作
通常由表示“此刻”的时间状语（now, at this moment），或通过Look/Listen!这两个提示
语来表明此时此刻动作正在进行。
She is making a fire now.
她正在生火。
Listen! Mary is singing an English song in the classroom.
听！玛丽正在教室里唱英文歌。
b. 表示现在时间段中正在进行的动作
They are planting trees on the hill these days.
这几天他们正在山上种树。
I don't really work here; I am just helping out until the new secretary arrives.
我并不在这儿工作，我只是在新秘书来之前帮帮忙罢了。
c. 表示按计划或安排将要发生的动作
能这样用的动词并不多，通常是arrive, begin, come, do, drive, fly, go, leave, stay 等表示位
置转移的动词。这种用法比较生动，给人以一种期待感。
Jane and Betty are going on holiday in a few days.
几天后简和贝蒂将出去度假。
9
Where are you staying in Guangzhou?
你到广州后准备住在哪里？
②现在进行时的特殊用法
a. 表示一种重复的动作，带有“厌恶”、“赞叹”等感情色彩
现在进行时往往与constantly, always, forever 等状语连用，给现在的动作披上一层感情色
彩。
She's constantly complaining.
她不停地抱怨。
My brother is always leaving things about.
我弟弟总是乱丢东西。
He is forever thinking of doing more for the students.
他总是想着为学生多做些事情。
b. 表示某一具体动作或心理状态的发展过程
The house is falling down.
房子正在倒下。
The weather is changing for the better.
天气慢慢转好了。
注意：
有时表示一个动作刚刚开始。
I'm forgetting my English.
我的英语开始忘了。
Food is costing more.
食品贵了起来。
c. 强调动作的重复
The train is arriving late almost every day this summer.
这个夏季火车几乎天天晚点。
Someone is knocking at the door.
有人不断地在敲门。
The boy is jumping with joy.
那男孩高兴地跳个不停。
d. 表示两个动作是同一动作
He who helps others is helping himself.
帮人就是帮自己。
If you insist on doing it, you are doing a foolish thing.
如果你坚持做这件事，你就是在干傻事。
e.be 动词的进行时态
be 动词一般不用于进行时态。但有时可用“am, is, are + being +形容词”结构表示暂时或
故意如此。
The boy is being naughty. 这孩子有点儿淘气。
I don't think you are being fair.
我认为你不公平。
He is being modest.
他现在很谦虚。
比较：
You are not polite.
你不讲礼貌。（一贯如此）
You are not being polite.
你可有点儿不礼貌了。（暂时的现象）
3．不用进行时态的动词
①表示状态的动词
这类动词有seem, look, appear, have, belong to, own, hold 等。
This backpack belongs to me.
这背包是我的。
1
He seems rather angry with you.
看起来他很生你的气。
②表示知道、信念、理解、推测、怀疑、希望等含义的动词
这类动词有know, remember, understand, see, think, believe, suppose, hope, doubt 等。
I don't think he will come tomorrow.
我想他明天不会来。
I still remember the days when we studied together.
我还记得我们一起学习的那些日子。
提示：
有时这些动词的进行时态可表示心理状态的缓慢发展过程。
She's understanding you better now.
她越来越了解你了。
③表示要求、心愿等意义的动词
这类动词有want, wish, need, desire 等。
Your clothes need washing.
你的衣服需要洗了。
How I wish I were a bird ！
我多希望我是一只鸟啊！
④表示继续或持续含义的动词
这类动词有continue, keep, last, go on 等。
She still continues in poor health.
她仍然身体很差。
Every day after finishing his homework, he goes on to do some reading.
他每天做完作业后，都会继续看会儿书。
⑤表示感觉的动词
这类动词有see, hear, smell, taste, feel 等。
The apples taste good.
这些苹果尝起来不错。
This flower smells nice.
这花闻上去很香。
Your suggestion sounds reasonable.
你的建议听上去有道理。
注意：
如果这些动词表示一种有意识的行为，则可用进行时态。
She is tasting the apple.
她正在尝苹果。
The dog is smelling the footprints.
狗正在嗅脚印。
The bell is sounding for dinner.
晚饭铃响了。
4．现在进行时和一般现在时的比较
①暂时性动作和经常性动作
The computer is working perfectly.
计算机运转得很好。（暂时）
The computer works perfectly.
计算机运转很好。（一直如此）
②持续性动作和短暂性动作
The bus is stopping.
车停了下来。（渐渐地）
The bus stops. 车停了。（迅速）
③暂时性动作和永久性动作
She is living in the country.
她现在住在农村。（暂时）
1
She lives in the country.
她住在农村。（永久）
④有感情色彩和没有感情色彩
He is doing well at school.
他在学校表现很好。（赞扬）
He does well at school.
他在学校表现很好。（一般事实）
B.
过去进行时
1.过去进行时的构成
过去进行时是由“was / were +现在分词”构成的。
I was doing my homework at this time yesterday.
昨天的这个时候我正在做作业。
Were you expecting him yesterday?
你昨天一直在等他吗？
They were not talking when I came in.
我进来的时候他们没在说话。
2.过去进行时的用法
①过去进行时的基本用法
a. 表示在过去某一时刻正在发生的动作或该动作与过去的另一动作同时发生
I was having supper at 7:00 yesterday evening.
昨天晚上7 点我正在吃晚饭。
She was playing the piano while I was reading the newspaper.
她弹钢琴时我在看报。
提示：
当句子意思很清楚时，我们也可以把两个动词都换成一般过去时。
We listened closely while the teacher read the text.
老师读课文时，我们都仔细地听着。
b. 表示过去一段时间内正在进行的动作
We were talking about you the whole morning.
我们整个上午都在说你。
He was watching TV at home from 3:00 to 5:00 yesterday afternoon.
昨天下午从3 点到5 点他一直在看电视。
c. 表示按计划、安排过去将要发生的事
He told me that he was going soon.
他告诉我他很快就要走了。
She said she was leaving for New York the next month.
她说她下个月动身去纽约。
②过去进行时的特殊用法
a. 表示故事发生的背景
It was snowing as the medical team made its way to the front.
那支医疗小组往前线行进时天正下着雪。
Tom slipped into the house when no one was looking.
汤姆乘没人注意时溜进了房间。
b. 表示一个新的动作刚刚开始
过去进行时可用来引出一个新的动作，这种用法颇有点儿像镜头转换。
Five minutes later, he was standing at the door, smoking.
5 分钟后，他已站在门口抽着烟。
The baby was crying hard, and suddenly the crying stopped.
这婴儿在大声啼哭，突然，哭声停止了。
c. 用来陈述原因或用作借口
She went to the doctor yesterday. She was having a lot of trouble with her heart.
她昨天去看病了。她患了很严重的心脏病。
I haven't finished my homework because I was helping my mother at home all day
1
yesterday.
我作业没做完是因为我昨天一直帮妈妈在家干活。
d. 与always, constantly 等词连用，表示感情色彩
The girl was always changing her mind.
这女孩老是改变主意。
In the past he was constantly asking me for money.
过去他总是向我要钱。
3 ．过去进行时与一般过去时的区别
①一般过去时往往表示某一动作已经完成，而过去进行时却表示动作在持续或未完成。
She wrote a letter to her friend last night.
她昨晚给朋友写了封信。（信写完了）
She was writing a letter to her friend last night.
她昨晚一直在给朋友写信。（信不一定写完）
②一般过去时表示只做一次动作，而过去进行时却表示动作反复地进行。
She waved to me.
她朝我挥了挥手。
She was waving to me.
她不断地朝我挥手。
The boy jumped up and down.
这男孩跳了一下。
The boy was jumping up and down.
这男孩不停地跳着。
C. 将来进行时
1 ．将来进行时的构成
将来进行时是由“shall/will + be +现在分词”构成的。
Don't phone me between 8:00 and 10:00. We'll be having classes then.
8 点到10 点之间不要给我打电话，我们那时正在上课。
Will you be using your bicycle this evening?
今晚你用自行车吗？
She won't be having a meeting in her office at 8:00 tomorrow.
明天8 点她不在开会。
2 ．将来进行时的用法
①将来进行时的基本用法
a. 表示在将来某一时间正在进行的动作
I'll be taking my holiday soon.
我不久就去度假了。
They will be meeting us at the station.
他们会在车站接我们的。
b. 在口语中代替will/shall do
I hope you will be coming on time.
我希望你按时来。
I'll be seeing Mr. Smith tomorrow.
我明天将见到史密斯先生。
The minister will be giving a speech on international affairs.
部长将就国际事务发表演讲。
②将来进行时的特殊用法
a. 表示原因、结果或猜测
Please come tomorrow afternoon. Tomorrow morning I'll be having a meeting.
请你明天下午来吧。我明天上午有个会。（表原因）
Stop the child or he will be falling over.
抓住那个孩子，要不他会掉下去的。（表结果）
You will be making a mistake.
你会出错的。（表推测）
1
b. 用在问句中，表示委婉礼貌
Will you be reading anything else?
你还要看点儿什么吗？
When shall we be meeting again?
我们什么时候再见面？
c. 表示稍后一点儿的安排
The students aer studying Unit 3 this week, and next week we'll be studying Unit 4.
这星期我们学第三单元，下周我们将学第四单元。
My duties will end in July and I will be returning to Shanghai.
我的任务在7 月结束，之后我会回上海。
三、完成时
完成时是用来表示动作的完成与未完成的情况。完成时包括现在完成时、过去完成时和
将来完成时。
A．现在完成时
1 ．现在完成时的构成
现在完成时的构成形式是“have / has + 过去分词”。现在完成时常被称为“与现在有联
系的过去”，因此它不能与明确的过去时间状语连用。
Someone has broken the window.
有人把窗户打破了。
I haven't seen much of her lately.
我最近不常见到她。
How long have they been married?
他们结婚多长时间了？
2．现在完成时的用法
①表示结果的现在完成时
现在完成时着眼于过去的动作对现在产生的结果或影响。这是现在完成时的“已完成”
用法，表示动作或过程发生在说话之前就已完成，并与现在有联系。这种联系实际上就是
“过去的动作”对现在的影响或产生的结果。
I have bought a pen.
我买了一支笔。（结果：I have a pen now.）
The temperature has increased by 10 ℃.
温度上升了10 摄氏度。（结果：It is quite hot now.）
Air pollution has taken the lives of many people.
空气污染已经夺去了很多人的生命。（结果：Air pollution is very serious now.）
注意：
现在完成时的上下文所指的时态必须呼应。
【误】I have bought a pen but I have lost it now.（have bought 表示你现在已经有笔了，
这和后面的have lost 有矛盾）
【正】I bought a pen but I have lost it now.
我（过去）买了一支笔，但我已经把它丢了。
【误】I have lost my pen but I have found it now. （have lost 强调你现在已经没有笔了，
与后面have found 的意思有冲突）
【正】I lost my pen but I have found it now.
我丢了一支笔，但现在已经找到了。
②表示经历的现在完成时
强调过去某一时刻到说话时这段时间中的经历。
Have you ever been to the Great Wall?
你去过长城吗？
I have visited Beijing at least ten times.
北京我至少访问过十次了。
She has never spent a holiday at the seaside.
她从未到海滨度过假。
1
③表示延续的现在完成时
这是现在完成时的“未完成”用法，表示一个动作或状态从过去某时开始，持续到现在，
可能要继续下去。
He's loved fishing for a long time.
他爱好钓鱼为时已久。（他现在仍爱好钓鱼）
I have lived here for more than thirty years.
我已在这儿住了三十多年了。（也许还会继续住下去）
注意：
现在完成时的“未完成”用法既可用于动态动词（主要是持续动词），也可用于状态动词，
但它一般不适用于表示短暂动作或位置转移的动词，如：open, break, go, come, arrive, leave
等。如用这类动词表示“未完成”，通常只限于否定结构。
I haven't seen a film for weeks.
我已经好几个星期没看电影了。
She hasn't written to me since September.
自从9 月份以来她还没给我写过信呢。
3．现在完成时的时间状语
①与现在完成时“已完成”用法连用的时间状语
现在完成时表示的动作或状态发生在现在时间以前的某个未明确指出的过去时间内，和
它连用的时间状语要与现在时间有关，不能是明确地表示过去的时间状语。
a. 不确定的过去时间状语：already, yet, before, recently, lately 等
I've seen the film before.
我以前看过这部电影。
Have you been there lately?
近来你去过那里吗?
b. 频度时间状语：often, sometimes, ever, never, once, rarely 等
We have never heard of that.
我们从未听说过这事。
He has sometimes played tennis.
他有时打网球。
Big Ben has rarely gone wrong.
大本钟很少出差错。
c. 包含现在时间在内的时间状语：now, just, today, this morning, this week, this year 等
I have just finished the letter now.
我现在刚写完信。
You have just missed the bus.
你刚好错过公共汽车。
Has he done much work today?
他今天做了很多工作吗？
比较：already 和yet 用法上的区别
already 常用于肯定句，置于句中。yet 常用于否定句和疑问句，置于句末。但already 有
时也可用在疑问句中暗示惊讶的心情。
She has already gone.
她早就走了。
Have you eaten your dinner already?
你已经吃过饭了?
He has not come yet.
他还没有来。
②与现在完成时“未完成”用法连用的时间状语
与“已完成”用法一样，表示具体的过去的时间状语不能与“未完成”用法连用。与其
连用的往往是指一段时间的状语以具体表示某一动作或状态持续了多久。
a. since + 具体时间，表示动作或状态从何时开始
Since then, he has developed another bad habit.
自那以后他养成了另一个坏习惯。
1
He hasn't been home since he graduated.
他毕业后就没回过家。
b. for + 一段时间，表示动作或状态持续了多久
We have worked here for ages.
我们在这里工作很久了。
There has been no rain here for nearly two months.
这里已经近两个月没有下雨了。
c. until now, up till now, so far, up to the moment
到目前为止
I have not seen him so far.
到目前为止我没见过他。
Up to the present, everything has been OK.
到目前为止一切正常。
d. in/during the past/last five years
在刚刚过去的5 年里
He has been away from school during the last few weeks.
过去的几个星期里他没在学校。
In the past few years they have dealt with quite a few international corporations
successfully. 在过去的几年中他们已经和好几家跨国公司做成了生意。
e. all the while, all day 一直，一整天
She has been busy all day.
她忙了一整天。
4．现在完成时和一般过去时的区别
①两者都可表示过去发生过的动作，但前者表示的是过去的动作对现在的影响，而后者
则只是表示过去有这一动作的事实。
He locked the door.
他锁过门。（但现在门是开是锁不清楚。）
He has locked the door.
他把门锁上了。（现在门是锁着的。）
Who turned on the light?
谁开的灯？（着眼开灯的动作，不管现在灯是开是关。）
Who has turned on the light?
谁把灯打开了？（着眼开灯的结果，即现在灯还亮着。）
②两者都可表示过去开始并延续了一段时间的动作，现在完成时表示该动作仍在继续，
而一般过去时则说明该动作现已终止。
He has lived in Beijing for four years.
他在北京住了四年了。（现在仍住那儿）
He lived in Beijing for four years.
他曾在北京住了四年。（现在不住那儿了）
B．过去完成时
过去完成时的动作须在过去某一时间之前发生，即发生在“过去的过去”。
1．过去完成时的构成
过去完成时是由“had+过去分词”构成的。
Soon I realized I had made a serious mistake.
我很快就意识到我犯了一个严重的错误。
The man sitting beside me on the plane was very nervous. He had not flown before.
飞机上坐在我旁边的人很紧张，他以前从没乘过飞机。
Had he gone home when you arrived? 你到的时候他已经回家了吗？
2．过去完成时的用法
①“已完成”用法
表示某一动作或状态在过去某一时间之前或过去某一动作之前已经完成。句中常用by 引
导的时间状语或以before, until, when, than 等词引导的内含一般过去时的时间状语从句。
By 5:00 yesterday morning we had done that work.
1
到昨天早上5 点钟时，我们已经做完了那件工作。
He had just finished sweeping the classroom when the teacher returned from the office.
老师从办公室回来时，他刚把教室打扫完。
They came earlier than we had expected.
他们到得比我们预料的要早。
I had learnt 5000 words before I entered the university.
我在进大学之前就已学了5000 个单词。
It rained yesterday after it had been dry for many months.
旱了好几个月之后，昨天下雨了。
注意：
在包含before 和after 的复合句中，因为从句动作和主句动作发生的先后顺序已经非常明
确，可以用一般过去时代替过去完成时。
The train (had) started before I reached the station.
在我到达车站之前，列车已经开了。
After he (had) arrived in England, Marx worked hard to improve his English.
马克思到达英格兰之后，努力提高他的英语水平。
②“未完成”用法
表示一个动作或状态在过去某一时刻之前就已开始，一直持续到这一过去时间，还可能
再持续下去。
Up to that time all had gone well.
直到那时一切都很顺利。
John and Jane had known each other for a long time before their marriage.
约翰和简在结婚前就认识很长时间了。
She said she had made much progress since she came here.
她说自从她到这儿后已取得了很大的进步。
③“想象性”用法
过去完成时有时表示一种未实现的愿望或想法，主要用在if 引导的和过去事实相反的条
件句以及wish, as if 引导的从句中。
If she had worked hard, she would have succeeded.
要是她努力的话，她就会成功了。（事实上她没努力，也没成功。）
I wish I had gone with you to the concert.
我要是和你一起去音乐会就好了。
The two strangers talked as if they had been good friends for many years.
那两个陌生人交谈起来就像是多年的老朋友。
④表示“刚刚……就……”
过去完成时常用在hardly/scarcely/barely ... when..., no sooner ... than ... 等结构中，表示
“刚刚……就……”。
Hardly had he begun to speak when the audience interrupted him.
他刚开始演讲，听众就打断了他。
No sooner had he arrived than he went away again.
他刚到就又走了。
提示：
intend, mean, hope, want, plan, suppose, expect, think
等动词的过去完成时可以用来表示
一个本来打算做而未做的事。
I had meant to come, but something happened.
我原本打算来的，但有事发生了。
I had intended to call on you, but was prevented from doing so.
我本打算去看你的，但没能去成。
They had wanted to help but couldn't get here in time.
他们原想帮忙的，但没能及时赶到这里。
3．过去完成时与一般过去时的比较
一般过去时表示过去时间的动作或状态。过去完成时表示的动作或状态发生在一般过去
时表示的动作或状态之前，因此它表示的是“比过去更过去”。
1
I returned the book that I had borrowed.
我已归还了我借的书。
He didn't know a thing about the verb, for he had not studied his lessons.
他对动词一无所知，因为他没有好好学习功课。
I had been at the bus stop for 20 minutes when a bus finally came.
我在车站等了20 分钟车才来。
C ．将来完成时
1 ．将来完成时的构成
将来完成时的构成是由“shall/ will + have +过去分词”构成的。
Before long he will have forgotten all about the matter.
不久他就会全然忘记这件事的。
He is somebody now. He will not have remembered his old classmates.
他现在是一个有身份的人了，他可能不会记得老同学了。
Will you have known Kevin for 10 years next month?
到下个月你认识凯文该有10 年了
吧？
2.将来完成时的用法
①表示在将来某一时间之前已完成的动作，并往往对将来某一时间产生影响。
We shall have learned 12 units by the end of this term.
到这个学期末，我们将学完12 个单元。
By the time you get home I will have cleaned the house from top to bottom.
你到家之前我将把房子彻底打扫一遍。
Will you soon have finished laying the table?
你会很快摆放好餐桌吗？
注意：
在时间状语从句中，不用将来完成时，要用现在完成时来代替。
When I have finished that, I shall have done all I am supposed to do.
等我做完这件事时，我就做完我该做的所有的事了。
Please don't get off the bus until it has stopped.
请待车停稳了再下车。
②表示推测
You will have heard of this, I guess.
我想你已经听说过这件事了。
I am sure he will have got the information.
我相信他一定得到了这个信息。
四、完成进行时
完成进行时是完成时和进行时的结合，包括现在完成进行时和过去完成进行时。
A.
现在完成进行时
1．现在完成进行时的构成
现在完成进行时是由“have/has been +现在分词”构成的。
He is ill. He's been lying in bed for three weeks.
他病了，已经卧床3 个星期了。
Your eyes are red. Have you been crying?
你眼睛红了。你刚刚哭过了吗？
What have you been doing all this time?
这半天你干什么来着？
2．现在完成进行时的用法
①表示动作从过去某时开始，一直延续到现在
现在完成进行时常和all this time, this week, this month, all night, all the morning,
recently 等状语以及since 和for 引导的状语连用。
I have been reading Hemingway's Farewell to Arms recently.
我最近一直在读海明威的《永别了，武器》。
She has been reciting the words all the morning.
她整个上午都在背单词。
1
This is what I have been expecting since my childhood.
这是我从小以来就一直期待着的事情。
②表示动作刚刚结束
My clothes are all wet. I've been working in the rain.
我的衣服全湿了，我刚才一直在雨中干活。
He is dead drunk. He's been drinking with his friends.
他烂醉如泥，他刚才一直在和朋友们喝酒。
③表示一个近期内时断时续、重复发生的动作
You've been saying that for five years.
这话你已经说了五年了。
He has been writing articles to the newspapers and magazines since he became a teacher.
自从任教以来，他一直在为报刊杂志撰稿。
④表达较重的感情色彩
What have you been doing to my dictionary?
看你把我的字典弄成什么样子了！
Time has been flying so quickly!
时间过得可真快啊！
Too much has been happening today.
今天可真是个多事的日子。
3． 现在完成进行时和现在完成时的比较
①现在完成进行时可以表示动作的重复，而现在完成时一般不表示重复性。
Have you been meeting him recently?
你最近常和他见面吗？
Have you met him recently?
你最近见到过他吗？
②现在完成进行时有时含有感情色彩，而现在完成时一般是平铺直叙。
I have been waiting for you for two hours.
我一直等了你两个小时。（可能表示不满）
I have waited for you for two hours.
我等了你两个小时。（说明一个事实）
③现在完成进行时强调动作，而现在完成时强调结果。
Who has been eating the oranges?
谁一直在吃这些桔子呀？（还剩余一些）
Who has eaten the oranges?
谁把桔子吃光了？（强调吃得一个不剩）
B.
过去完成进行时
1.过去完成进行时的构成
过去完成进行时是由“had been +现在分词”构成。
She had been suffering from a bad cold when she took the exam.
她在考试之前一直患重感冒。
Had they been expecting the news for some time?
他们期待这个消息有一段时间了吧？
Rafael was scolded even though he hadn't been doing anything wrong.
尽管拉斐尔没做什么错事，但他还是挨骂了。
2.过去完成进行时的用法
①表示过去某一时间之前一直进行的动作
过去完成进行时表示动作在过去某一时间之前开始，一直延续到这一过去时间。和过去完
成时一样，过去完成进行时也必须以一过去时间为前提。
I had been looking for it for days before I found it.
这东西我找了好多天才找着的。
They had only been waiting for the bus a few moments when it came.
他们只等了一会儿车就来了。
②表示反复的动作
1
He had been mentioning your name to me.
他过去多次向我提到过你的名字。
You had been giving me everything.
你对我真是有求必应。
③过去完成进行时还常用于间接引语中（详见第12 章）
The doctor asked what he had been eating.
医生问他吃了什么。
I asked where they had been staying all those days.
我问他们那些天是待在哪儿的。
④过去完成进行时之后也可接具有“突然”之意的when 分句
I had only been reading a few minutes when he came in.
我刚看了几分钟他就进来了。
She'd only been reviewing her lessons for a short while when her little sister interrupted
her.
她温习功课才一会儿，她妹妹就打断她了。
3．过去完成进行时和过去完成时的比较
She had cleaned the office, so it was very tidy.
她已经打扫过办公室了，所以很整洁。（强调结果）
She had been cleaning the office, so we had to wait outside.
她一直在打扫办公室，所以我们不得不在外面等着。（强调动作一直在进行）
2
第二章 被动语态（一）
语态也是动词的一种形式，表示主语与谓语之间的关系。英语有两种语态：主动语态
(active voice) 和被动语态(passive voice) 。主动语态表示主语是谓语动作的执行者，而
被动语态则表示主语是谓语动作的承受者。
一、被动语态的构成
被动语态是由助动词be 加及物动词的过去分词构成，如果有必要强调动作的执行者，动
作执行者可以由介词by 引出的短语表示。助动词be 随主语的人称、数、时态和语气的不
同而变化。
A. 十种常见时态的被动语态
1. 一般现在时
主动语态：do
被动语态：amisare done
We clean the classroom every day. 我们每天打扫教室。
The classroom is cleaned by us every day. 教室每天都由我们打扫。
Such songs are usually sung by girls.
这些歌通常是女孩子们唱的。
Russian is not taught in our school.
我们学校不教俄语。
Are many goods shipped abroad every day
每天都有许多货物运往国外吗
2. 一般过去时
主动语态：did
被动语态：waswere done
We cleaned the classroom yesterday. 昨天我们打扫了教室。
The classroom was cleaned by us yesterday. 昨天教室被我们打扫了。
The window was broken by my son.
窗子是我儿子打破的。
Were many trees planted on the hill yesterday
昨天山上种了许多树吗？
How much money was stolen in all
一共被偷了多少钱？
3. 一般将来时
主动语态：willshall do
被动语态：willshall be done
We will clean the classroom soon. 我们很快要打扫教室。
The classroom will be cleaned soon. 教室很快要被打扫了。
The work will be done immediately.
这工作将马上做。
Will the school sports meeting be held next week ？ 校运动会将在下星期举行吗？
When shall we be given a lecture on the Internet
什么时候给我们作有关因特网的
讲座？
4. 一般过去将来时
主动语态：would do
被动语态：would be done
We told him that we would clean the classroom soon.
我们告诉他我们马上就打扫
教室。
We told him that the classroom would be cleaned soon.
我们告诉他教室很快就会
被打扫的。
He said that a new trade center would be built in the centre of the city.
他说一个
新的贸易中心将在市中心建起来。
She asked whether their plan would be considered with great care. 她问他们的计
划会不会得到仔细的考虑。
I wasn't told that I should be invited to the party. 没人告诉我要被邀请出席晚会。
5. 现在进行时
主动语态：amisare doing
被动语态：amisare being done
2
We are cleaning the classroom now. 我们现在正在打扫教室。
The classroom is being cleaned now. 教室现在正在被打扫。
A hospital is being built in the centre of the town. 镇中心正在兴建一家医院。
Are the babies being taken care of by this nurse
这些婴儿正由这个护士照看吗？
How is the new teaching method being tried there 那里是怎样试行这种新教学方法
的？
6. 过去进行时
主动语态：waswere doing
被动语态：waswere being done
We were cleaning the classroom this time yesterday.
昨天这个时候我们在打扫教
室。
The classroom was being cleaned this time yesterday.
昨天这个时候教室正在被打
扫
The teaching plan was being discussed at that time.
那时正在讨论教学计划。
Was the TV set being fixed this time yesterday
昨天这个时候电视机正在被修理
吗？
The house was being painted when we arrived at his home.
我们到他家时，他家
房子正在粉刷。
7. 现在完成时
主动语态：hashave done
被动语态：hashave been done
The classroom looks tidy. We have cleaned it. 教室看起来很整洁。我们已经打扫了。
The classroom looks tidy. It has been cleaned. 教室看起来很整洁。它已经被打扫了
Many foreign films have been shown on TV since last month. 上个月以来，电视中
播放了许多外国影片。
The radio has not been turned on yet.
收音机还没开。
Has a new training centre been set up in our town
我们镇上新的培训中心建好了
吗？
8. 过去完成时
主动语态：had done
被动语态：had been done
The classroom looked tidy. We had cleaned it. 教室看起来很整洁。我们已经打扫过
了。
The classroom looked tidy. It had been cleaned.
教室看起来很整洁。它已经被打扫
过了。
His newly written novel had been translated into English by the end of last
month.上个月末，他刚写的小说已被翻译成了英语。
She told me that she had been dismissed by her boss.
她告诉我，她的老板已把
她解雇了。
Her homework had not been finished when I got home.
我到家的时候，她的作业
还没有完成。
9. 将来完成时
主动语态：willshall have done
被动语态：willshall have been done
We will have cleaned the classroom by five o'clock. 我们将在五点之前打扫完教室。
The classroom will have been cleaned by five o'clock. 教室将在五点以前打扫完。
The new books will have been entered in the register before another parcel
arrives. 这些新书在下一批书到来前将登记完毕。
How many expressways will have been completed by the end of next year
到明
年年底将建成多少条高速公路？
Before you return my work will have been done.
你回来前我的工作将会做完。
2
10. 过去将来完成时
主动语态：would have done
被动语态：would have been done
I said we would have cleaned the classroom by 500.
我说我们将在五点之前打扫完
教室。
I said the classroom would have been cleaned by 500.
我说教室将在五点以前打扫
完。
The headmaster said the article would have been translated by the end of next
month. 校长说文章将在下月底翻译好。
The day was drawing near when the dam would have been completed.
大坝完工
的日子不远了。
He told me that preparations would have been finished by 600. 他告诉我准备工作
将在六点前完成。
B. “get+过去分词”结构
被动语态除常用“be + 过去分词”构成外，还可用“get+过去分词”结构。这种结构多用在
口语中，强调动作的结果。
The boy got hurt when he was riding to school. 那孩子骑车上学时受伤了。
Did your letter get answered 你收到回信了吗？
注意：
用“get+过去分词”结构时，其后的动作执行者（即by 短语）一般不表示出来。
Finally his bike got repaired. 最后他的自行车得到了修理。
As I passed by, my skirt got caught on a nail.
我经过的时候，我的裙子被钉子挂住
了。
C ．“seem appear + 过去分词”结构
有时“seem appear + 过去分词”也可以构成被动语态。
She seemed annoyed by his words. 她似乎被他的话搞得很恼火。
The house appears deserted. 这房子好像没人居住。
提示：
并不是所有的“be+过去分词”结构中的be 都能被get 或seem, appear 等词代替。
【误】She got born in a small village.
【正】She was born in a small village. 她出生在一个小村庄。
【误】The old man got offered a large sum of money.
【正】The old man was offered a large sum of money. 这位老人获得了一大笔钱。
【误】Colin got caught cheating in the exam.
【正】Colin were caught cheating in the exam. 科林考试作弊被抓住了。
D．被动语态中常用的介词
1 ．by 表示动作的执行者或施加者
By whom is the book written 这本书是谁写的？
The children were driven indoors by the rain. 孩子们被雨赶进了室内。
2 ．with 表示用某种工具
The wolf was killed with a gun. 狼被枪打死了。
The field was spread with wild flowers. 田野里野花遍地。
3 ．from 表示源于某种物质（看不出原材料）
Good wine is made from grain. 好酒是粮食制成的。
4 ．of 表示用某种材料制成（看得出原材料）
The table is made of wood. 这张桌子是用木头做的。
5 ．其他介词
You are wanted on the phone. 有电话找你。
He is known to everybody. 大家都认识他。
She was caught in the rain. 她遭雨淋了。
注意：
2
动作执行者可以由介词by 引出的短语表示，但被动语态句子中的by 短语并不总是表示
动作执行者。
A policeman is known by the clothes he wears.
警察可以通过他的服装辨认出来。
（by 表示方式）
He was much flattered by her asking him to dinner. 她邀请他吃晚饭，他受宠若惊了。
（by 表示原因）
The snow was piled high by the gate. 门口雪堆积得很高。（by 表示地点）
二、被动语态的用法
英语中，大多数情况下用主动语态比较简练、有力。但是，被动语态也有其特殊的用途，
它也是表达思想、描述事物的需要。人们通常在下列情况下使用被动语态：
A. 不知道或不必说出动作的执行者
How is this word pronounced 这个单词怎么发音？
Scientists say that work is done whenever a force moves. 科学家们说，力移动时就
做了功。
A greater number of magic English books will be published next year. 明年将有更
多的魔法英语书出版。
After war, everything had been destroyed. 战争结束后，一切都被毁坏了。
B. 强调动作的承受者
If you break the school rules, you will be punished. 如果你违反校规，你将受到惩罚。
（强调you）
A new Hope School will be opened in our village.
我们家乡将开办一所新的希望学
校。（强调a new Hope School）
She is liked by everybody. 大家都喜欢她。
Xiao Li was elected monitor of the class. 小李被选为班长。
C. 动作的执行者不是人而是无生命的事物
The bridge was washed away by the flood. 桥被洪水冲走了。
We were shocked by the news of his death. 我们听到他的死讯极为震惊。
Many accidents were caused by careless driving. 许多事故都是开车不小心造成的。
D. 修辞的需要，为了使句子更加简练、匀称
He appeared on the stage and was warmly applauded by the audience.
他出现在
舞台上，受到了观众的热烈鼓掌。
The old professor gave a lecture on American history and was well received. 这位
老教授作了一个有关美国历史的讲座，受到大家的热烈欢迎。
I was shown round the school campus by Sean, who had entered the school just
a year before. 肖恩带我参观了校园，他去年刚进这所学校。
E. 为了表示委婉或礼貌，避免提及动作执行者或说话者自己
You've been told many times not to make the same mistake.
你已被多次告知不要
犯同样的错误。
Everybody is expected to obey the following rules. 希望大家遵守以下规定。
The control room may not be entered without permission. 非经许可，勿入控制室。
F. 科技文献中为了客观地描述事情及其过程
The film is coated with light-sensitive chemicals, which are changed by the
different shades and colours of light. 胶卷上涂了一层感光的化学物质，这些物质因光
的不同色度与颜色而改变。
G. 新闻报道中为了体现新闻的客观性
The west-east gas pipeline project was kicked off on July 4, a big event in the
nation's west development campaign. 西气东输工程7 月4 日全线开工，这是国家西部
大开发战略的一件大事。
H ．有些动词习惯上常用被动语态
He was born in this city. 他出生在这个城市。
The school is situated in the suburbs. 这所学校位于郊外。
2
注意：
被动语态中的by 短语通常可以省去。但如果by 短语是句子的重点所在，或者没有by
短语全句的意思不完整时，则要保留by 短语。
The vegetables didn't taste very good. They had been cooked too long.
蔬菜的味
道不好，烧的时间太长了。（不需要动作的执行者）
He arrived at the airport, where he was met by his friend. 他到达了机场并受到朋友
的迎接。（没有by his friend，句子的意思不完整）
Everybody was cast down by such news as that. 大家都被那种消息搞得很沮丧。
（需
要by 短语）
三、主动语态变被动语态
中国人的思维的着眼点在动作的施动者，英美人思维的着眼点在动作的承受者。
中国人常这样说：I expect you to be there on time. 我希望你准时到那里。
英美人常这样说：You are expected to be there on time. 希望你准时到那里。
这就是英语中被动语态的使用比汉语中多的原因。由于英语句子的主动语态结构不同，
因而变成被动语态的方式也各不相同。
A. 主语 + 谓语 + 宾语
“主语 + 谓语 + 宾语”结构中只有一个宾语，变为被动语态时，将宾语变为主语：
They will discuss the plan at the meeting. 他们将在会议上讨论这个问题。
-- The plan will be discussed at the meeting. 这个问题将在会议上讨论。
In the past the king possessed great wealth. 过去国王拥有巨大的财富。
n In the past great wealth was possessed by the king. 过去，巨大的财富为国
王所拥有。
B. 主语+谓语+间接宾语+直接宾语
在这个句型中，谓语动词跟有两个宾语。变成被动语态时，一般将通常指人的间接宾语
转化成主语，但有时也可将指物的间接宾语转化成主语：
We gave the student some books. 我们给了这个学生几本书。
-- The student was given some books. 这个学生被给了几本书。
-- Some books were given to the student. 几本书被给了这个学生。
His father bought him a computer last week. 上周他父亲给他买了一台电脑。
-- He was bought a computer by his father last week.
上周他父亲给他买了一台电
脑。
-- A computer was bought for him by his father last week. 上周他父亲给他买了一台
电脑。
注意：用直接宾语作被动语态的主语时，通常要在间接宾语前加上适当的介词(如to, for,
of 等)，以加强间接宾语的语气。
They awarded him the Nobel Prize. 他们授予他诺贝尔奖。
-- The Nobel Prize was awarded （to）him. 诺贝尔奖被授予给他。
The host had caught us some fish. 主人给我们捉了一些鱼。
Some fish had been caught for us by the host.
主人给我们捉了一些鱼。（for 不可
省）
C.
主语+谓语+宾语+宾语补足语
在这个句型中，谓语动词后有一个宾语和一个宾语补足语，变成被动语态时，宾语转化
成主语，宾语补足语也随之变为主语补足语：
All the villagers painted the houses white. 所有村民都把房子涂成了白色。
-- The houses were painted white by all the villagers. 房子都被所有的村民都涂成了
白色。
They kept us waiting for a long time. 他们让我们等了很长时间。
-- We were kept waiting for a long time. 我们等了很长时间。
We regarded him as the best doctor in town. 我们认为他是城里最好的医生。
-- He was regarded as the best doctor in town. 他被认为是城里最好的医生。
注意：
2
有些使役动词和感官动词,如make, see, hear, watch, notice, observe, listen to等，在
主动结构中跟不带to 的动词不定式作宾语补足语，在变为被动结构时，不定式应加上to。
We heard him say good-bye to his friends. 我们听见他向朋友们道别。
He was heard to say good-bye to his friends. 他被听到向朋友们道别。
D. 含有情态动词的主动句变被动句
含有情态动词的谓语变成被动语态时，用“情态动词+ be done”构成。
情态动词
cancould
maymight
must
havehad to
willwould
shallshould
ought to
主动形式
cancould do
maymight do
must do
havehad to do
willwould do
shallshould do
ought to do
被动形式
cancould be done
maymight be done
must be done
havehad to be done
willwould be done
shallshould be done
ought to be done
The machine must be operated with care. 这机器必须小心操作。
Such a sentence ought not to be used here. 这个句子不应该用在这里。
What's done cannot be undone. 覆水难收。
People had to be reminded of the danger that night.
那天晚上必须提醒人们当心危
险。
E. 含有“be going to do”和“be to do”等结构的主动句变被动句
含有“be going to do
和 be to do 等结构的谓语动词，变成被动语态时，分别用“be
going to + be done ”和“be to + be done ”。在这两种结构中，be 只有一般现在时和一般
过去时两种形式。
The problem is going to be discussed at the meeting. 这个问题将在会上讨论。
This new film is to be shown on TV next week. 这部新片下周将在电视上放映。
F．含有宾语从句的主动句变被动句
带有宾语从句的句子变成被动语态时，通常用it 来作为被动句的形式主语，宾语从句保
留不变。
They said that he had gone abroad to study English. 他们说他出国学英语去了。
-- It was said that he had gone abroad to study English. 据说他出国学英语去了。
We haven't decided when we should go camping. 我们还未决定什么时候去野营。
-- It hasn't been decided when we should go camping. 什么时候去野营尚未决定。
提示：
带有宾语从句的句子变成被动语态时，为了简练，还可把从句的主语变为被动句的主语，
从句的谓语部分还可以变为不定式短语。
We believed that he would succeed. 我们相信他会成功。
-- He was believed to succeed. 人们相信他会成功。
2
Father expected that I should become an engineer. 父亲希望我成为工程师。
-- I was expected (by my father) to become an engineer. （父亲）希望我成为工程师。
G ．祈使句的被动语态
肯定的祈使句的被动语态结构是：Let + 宾语 + be + 过去分词；否定的祈使句的被动语
态结构是：Don't + let + 宾语 + be + 过去分词（或Let + 宾语 + not + be + 过去分词）。
Move the desks into the corridor.
-- Let the desks be moved into the corridor. 把课桌搬到走廊去。
Don't trust her.
-- Don't let her be trusted.
-- Let her not be trusted. 不要相信她。
H. 动词短语构成的被动语态
一般情况下，只有及物动词才能跟宾语，而不及物动词不能跟宾语，所以只有及物动词
才有被动语态，不及物动词则没有被动语态。但有些不及物动词后面跟上介词或副词后，
变成一个动词短语，相当于一个及物动词，因此就可以有被动语态。
The nurses in this hospital look after the patients very well.
-- The patients are well looked after by the nurses in this hospital. 病人在这所医院
里被护士们照料得很周到。
They have put off the meeting till next Saturday.
-- The meeting has been put off till next Saturday. 会议已推迟到下周六了。
注意：
在使用被动语态时，千万不要遗漏句末的介词或副词。
Such a bad habit should be got rid of. 这样的坏习惯应该改掉。
All the important matters have now been attended to.
所有重要的事情都得到了处
理。
I. 双重被动结构
双重被动结构指的是句中谓语动词和其后的不定式均为被动结构，句子的主语既是谓语
动词的承受者，同时又是不定式动作的承受者。
They asked us to discuss the problem at once.
-- We were asked to discuss the problem at once.
-- The problem was asked to be discussed at once.
这个问题被要求立刻讨论。（双
重被动）
She offered to buy a recorder for me.
-- A recorder was offered to be bought for me. 有人提出要帮我买一台录音机。（双重
被动）
The teacher ordered that we should take the desk away.
-- The desk was ordered to be taken away. 课桌被要求搬走。（双重被动）
J ．下列句子变成被动语态时，要用with，不用by
Smoke filled the meeting room. 烟充满了会议室。
The meeting room was filled with smoke. 会议室里充满了烟。
A cloth covered the table. 一块布把桌子罩了起来。
The table was covered with a cloth. 桌子上铺着一块布。
K ．不能变为被动语态的结构
1 ．受动词的限制
①表示状态的及物动词，只能用于主动语态。
某些表示状态的及物动词，如have, own, cost, lack, want ( 缺乏), become (适合), fit,
resemble, fail, last, flee, benefit, hold 等作谓语时，不能变为被动句。
She resembles her mother. 她像她妈妈。
He lacks self-confidence. 他缺乏自信。
This hall can hold 2,000 people. 这个大厅能容纳两千人。
②当及物动词have 表示“吃饭”、“患病”、“明白”、“知道”等意思时，没有被动语态形式。
Would you have a cup of tea 你要喝杯茶吗？
She had a bad cold yesterday, and now she is feeling much better.
昨天她得了重
2
感冒，现在好多了。
③当动词get，take 表示“懂得”、“知道”，owe 表示“欠”，cost 表示“使失去(生命、健
康等)”的意思时，动词没有相应的被动语态。
Do you get me 你明白我的意思吗？
How do you take this passage 这段话你怎么理解？
I owe 50 pounds to you. 我欠你五十英镑。
His careless driving cost his life. 他粗心的驾驶使他丧了命。
2 ．受宾语的限制
①当宾语是相互代词、反身代词或具有类似相互代词的关系时，动词不能用于被动语态
形式。
They simply cannot contain themselves for joy. 他们简直无法抑制内心的喜悦。
He absented himself from a meeting yesterday. 他昨天缺席会议了。
For years the two sisters looked after one another. 多年来两姐妹互相照顾。
②当宾语前带有主语的形容词性物主代词时，谓语动词通常不能转换为被动语态。
I could not believe my eyes when I saw him still alive. 看到他还活着，我简直不相信
自己的眼睛。
The doctor shook his head and then went out without any words. 医生摇了摇头，
一句话也没说就出去了。
注意：
动词的宾语是身体的一部分，一般不可变为被动语态，但也有例外。
He fixed his eyes on the oil painting. 他注视着这幅油画。
-- His eyes were fixed on the oil painting. 他的两眼注视着这幅油画。
③当宾语起状语作用，表示数量、重量、大小或程度时，不能用被动语态。
This kind of dictionary costs ten dollars. 这种字典价值十美元。
The case weighs twenty kilos. 这箱子重二十公斤。
④当宾语是同源宾语时，通常不能转换成被动语态。
He laughed a hearty laugh. 他由衷地笑了笑。
She dreamt a sweet dream. 她做了一个美梦。
⑤如果宾语是动词不定式或动词的-ing 形式时，谓语动词一般不能变换成被动语态。
He admitted having done wrong. 他承认做错了。
He has decided to go and study abroad. 他已决定出国留学。
⑥如果enter, leave, reach 的宾语是地点、国家机关等，不能改为被动语态
He left the army in 1998. 他1998 年退伍。
She entered the hall at once. 她立刻就进入了大厅。
⑦另外，不可拆开的短语动词，如take place, lose heart, belong to, consist of, change
colour 等，也不能改为被动语态。
The book belongs to me. 这本书是我的。
She caught a very bad cold. 她患了重感冒。
必背：一些常见的不能变为被动语态的动宾词组
catch a cold
感冒
eat one's words
食言
lose heart
丧失信心
lose patience
失去耐心
make a face
做鬼脸
make up one's mind 决心
make bed
铺床
make room for
为……腾出地方
keep watch
守望
keep silence
保持安静
speak one's mind 表明见解
take place 发生
2
take one's time
从容不迫，别着急
take office 就职
take one's leave 请假
take notes
作笔记
take up arms 拿起武器
take one's place 就位
⑧含有would rather 或情态动词dare 的句子，不能改为被动语态。
I would rather do it now. 我宁可现在就干这件事。
He dare not do it. 他不敢干那件事。
四、被动语态与系表结构
所谓系表结构，在此指“连系动词+用作表语的动词-ed 形式”结构。它与被动语态的形式
完全一样，所以在应用时应注意它们的区别。
A. 被动语态中的过去分词是动词，多强调动作；系表结构中的过去分词相当于形容词，
多强调状态。前者通常可用by+人或by+抽象名词表动作的执行者，而后者则一般不用。
The gate to the garden was locked by the girl. 花园门被那个女孩锁上了。
（被动结构）
The gate to the garden was locked. 花园门锁了。（系表结构）
The tree was blown down by the high winds. 那棵树被大风吹倒了。（被动结构）
The tree was blown down when we saw it. 我们看到那棵树时，它已经被吹倒了。（系
表结构）
注意：
少数“连系动词be + 用作表语的动词-ed 形式”也带by 短语。
The old man was surrounded by small children. 老人被孩子们团团围住。
（被动语态）
Guilin is surrounded by hills and mountains. 桂林周围都是山。（系表结构）
We were held up by fog. 我们因雾受阻。（被动语态）
The tree is known by its fruit. 看到果子就知道是什么树。（系表结构）
B. 系表结构一般只用于一般现在时、一般过去时等少数几种时态；而被动语态可用多种
时态。
The composition is well written. 这篇作文写得很好。（系表结构）
The composition is being written. 这篇作文正在写。（被动语态）
C. 系表结构中的过去分词可被very, too, so 修饰，被动语态中的过去分词须用much
修饰。
The boy was too frightened to move. 这孩子吓得动也不敢动。（系表结构）
He was very excited. 他很激动。（系表结构）
He was much excited by the news. 他听到消息后很激动。（被动结构）
D. be + 不及物动词的过去分词通常是系表结构。
Her money is all gone. 她的钱都花光了。
The honoured guests are arrived. 贵宾们到了。
The moon is risen. 月亮升起来了。
She is grown up. 她长大了。
The leaves are fallen. 树叶落了。
We are prepared for the worst. 我们已准备好应付最坏的情况。
E. 表示“充满”意思的“be + 过去分词 + with”结构多为系表结构。
The mountain is covered with snow all the year round. 这座山终年被积雪覆盖。
The classroom was crowded with pupils. 教室里挤满了学生。
The lake is dotted with fishing boats. 湖里渔帆点点。
The floor was piled with old books. 地板上堆满了旧书。
F. remain, feel, lie, stand 以及 become, grow 等词 + 过去分词结构多为系表结构。
The matter remained unsettled. 这件事悬而未决。
She felt disappointed. 她感到失望。
The road became crowded. 道路拥挤了。
G. 句中有时间状语和地点状语时，一般为被动语态，反之为系表结构。
2
The bank is closed. 银行现在关门了。（系表结构）
The bank is usually closed at six. 银行通常六点关门。（被动语态）
He is married. 他结婚了。（系表结构）
五、主动形式表示被动意义
英语中有些结构形式上是主动的，而表达的意义却是被动的。
A ．某些不及物动词的被动意义
英语中一般只有及物动词才用于被动语态，不及物动词不用于这种结构。但有些时候，
某些不及物动词，其主动形式含有被动的意义。
When did the accident occur 事故是什么时候发生的？
Ice-cream always goes well in hot weather. 冰淇淋在暑天销路好。
Does life exist on the moon 月球上存在着生命吗？
B ．一些表示“开始”、“结束”意思的动词
Class begins at eight. 八点钟开始上课。
The meeting ended up with warm applause. 会议在热烈的掌声中结束了。
C ．一些表示“运转”意义的动词
The machine runs well. 机器运转良好。
His voice records well. 他的音录下来很好。
D ．当read, write, translate 等动词与表示行为方式的状语连用时
动词read, write, translate, act, add, wash, wear, cook, lock, sell, tear, cut, keep,
feel, burn, strike, last 等常和表示行为方式的状语连用，表示被动意义。这些动词既是及
物动词又是不及物动词。当主语是人时，是及物动词；当主语是物时，是不及物动词，即
用主动形式表示被动意义。
The book sells well. 这书的销路很好。
My pen writes smoothly. 我的笔很好写。
The play reads more easily than acts. 这剧本易读不易演。
提示：
这些动词常和情态动词（多半是否定式）连用，表示被动。
His car can't move. 他的车不能开了。
E ．表示状态特征的连系动词的被动意义
有些表示状态特征的连系动词，如look, smell, taste, sound, prove, appear, turn out
等主动形式表示被动意义。
Good medicine tastes bitter. 良药苦口。
What he said proved to be correct. 他的话证明是正确的。
The flowers smell sweet. 这些花闻起来很香。
Your sentence doesn't sound right. 你这话听起来不大对头。
F ．一些动词的进行时态可以表示一个被动的动作
The meat is cooking. 肉正在烧。
The book is printing.
这本书正在印刷之中。
G ．有些作表语的不定式，在结构上是主动的，但在意义上却是被动的
She is to blame. 她应该受到责备。
The house is to let. 此房出租。
六、被动形式表示主动意义
英语的被动形式表示主动的意义，主要见于状态被动语态句中。一般说来有以下几种情
况。
A ．反身动词的被动形式表示主动意义
反身动词（及物动词+反身代词）作谓语时，其宾语反身代词，表示动作返回到执行者本
身，主语既是动作的执行者，又是动作的承受者。由于反身动词具有这一特点，在被动结
构中动作的承受者，也就是动作的执行者，在句中表现出主动的意义。
He seats himself at the back of the classroom. 他坐在教室的后面。
-- He is seated at the back of the classroom. 他坐在教室的后面。
He lost himself in the forest.
3
-- He was lost in the forest. 他在森林中迷了路。
He dressed himself in a dark blue suit.
-- He was dressed in a dark blue suit. 他穿着一套深蓝色的衣服。
注意：
有些介词短语作定语或表语时，也有被动的含义。
The tall building under repair is an office building.
正在修建的那座高楼是一座办公楼。
The result is nnow under consideration.
结果现在正在考虑中。
个别介词短语用冠词时表示被动的意义，不用冠词表示主动意义。
The children are in the charge of this nurse.
孩子们由这位护士照管。
This nurse is in charge og the children.
这位护士负责照看孩子们。
B ．“引起……感情”等动词的被动形式表主动意义
The teacher is satisfied with what he said. 老师对他所说的感到满意。
We are opposed to unjust wars. 我们反对非正义的战争。
We are prepared to accept his proposal. 我们准备采纳他的建议。
He was tired with playing all day. 玩了一整天他感到很疲倦了。
C ．某些表示定位、移位的动词
The earth is tilted a little. 地球有点儿倾斜。
Hundreds of soldiers were stationed around the prison.
数百个士兵驻扎在监狱周
围。
The village is located at the foot of a hill. 这个村庄坐落在山脚下。
D ．不及物动词的-ed 形式与be 连用表示主动意义
Spring is come. 春天来了。
The moon was set and it was very dark. 月亮落了，天很黑。
He is advanced in years. 他年纪很大了。
E ．表示终止动词的-ed 形式
He is done with it. 他做完了这件事。
My fever is gone, but I still have a cough. 我的烧已经退了，但还有点儿咳嗽。
F ．一些习惯用法
He was graduated from Beijing University. 他毕业于北大。
You are mistaken. 你弄错了。
He is retired. 他退休了。
G ．被动的祈使句
Do be seated. 请坐！
Be prepared, please. 请准备好。
Get washed. 洗吧。
Be concerned more about the well-being of the masses. 多关心群众的生活。
He was married in Beijing. 他是在北京结婚的。（被动语态）
3
第三章虚拟语气
虚拟语气（the subjunctive mood ），又称假设语气，是谓语动词的一种形式，表示说话
人叙述的内容与事实相反，在现实中并不存在，或实现的可能性很小。
一、动词的语气
语气用来区别讲话人对某一行为或事情的看法和态度。英语中的语气(mood)有三种，分
别是陈述语气、祈使语气和虚拟语气。
1.陈述语气
陈述语气一般用来叙述事实或就事实提出询问，主要用于陈述句、疑问句和某些感叹句。
Where there is a will, there's a way. 有志者事竟成。
Can you help me carry the box upstairs 你能帮我把箱子搬到楼上吗？
How I missed the life in the countryside! 我多么想念乡村的生活啊！
2.祈使语气
祈使语气表示说话人向对方提出请求或下达命令。
Come this way, please! 请这边走。
Don't make any noise, will you 别吵，行吗？
Do be careful when crossing the street. 过马路时一定要小心。
3.虚拟语气
虚拟语气表示动作或状态不是客观存在的事实，而是说话人的主观愿望、假设或推测等。
If I were a bird, I could fly in the air. 如果我是一只小鸟，我就能在空中飞行。
I wish it were spring all the year round. 但愿四季如春。
May good luck be yours! 祝你好运！
二、条件句中的虚拟语气
英语中条件从句有两类，一类是真实条件句，另一类是非真实条件句。如果假设的情况可
能发生，是真实条件句；如果假设的情况是不存在的或不大可能发生的，则是虚拟条件句。
A．真实条件句
真实条件句表示的假设是可能发生或实现的，主句和从句的谓语动词都要用陈述语气。
If he doesn't come at 8, we won't wait for him. 如果他八点不来，我们就不等他了。
If a flood happened in the past, there was usually a great loss of life and property.
过去
发生洪水的话，常有很大的生命和财产损失。
We shall go there unless it rains tomorrow. 如果明天不下雨，我们将去那里。
I'll let you use my bike on condition that you keep it clean. 如果你能保持车子干净，我就让
你用我的自行车。
B．非真实条件句
在含有非真实条件句的复合句中，主句和从句的谓语动词都要用虚拟语气，其构成有三
3
种形式：
与现在事实相反 if 条件句的谓语：were did
主句的谓：would (couldshouldmight) + do
与过去事实相反 if 条件句的谓语：had done
主句的谓：would(couldshouldmight) + have done
与将来事实相反 if 条件句的谓语：didwere
主句的谓：should do would (couldshouldmight) + do were to do
1 ．表示与现在事实相反的条件
条件从句用动词的过去式（be 动词用were），主句用should（第一人称）或would（全
部人称）+动词原形。可用情态动词could, might 代替should, would 表示情态。
If it were Sunday tomorrow, I would go and see my friends. 明天要是星期天的话，我就去
看望我的朋友。
If I were you, I should go and try. 我要是你，我就去试试。
If wishes were horses, beggars might ride.
如果幻想能成为马匹，叫花子都有了坐骑
would go if they treated me like a slave.要是他们把我当奴隶对待，我就走。
2．表示与过去事实相反的条件
条件从句用动词的过去完成时，主句用should（第一人称）或would（全部人称）+have
done，也可用could, might 代替should, would。
If I had known your telephone number yesterday, I would have telephoned you.
如果昨天
我知道你的电话号码，我就给你打电话了。
If it had not rained this morning, I should have gone shopping. 今天早上要是没下雨，我就
去买东西了。
The flood might
have caused great damages to the people if we had not built so many
reservoirs.倘若我们没有修建这么多的水库，洪水就会使人民遭受巨大的损失。
3．表示在将来不太可能实现的条件
表示在将来不太可能实现的条件从句有三种形式：
①weredid
条件从句用动词的过去式（be 动词用were），主句用should（第一人称）或would（全
部人称）+动词原形。也可用could, might 代替should, would。
If he were here tomorrow, I would speak to him.明天如果他在这里的话，我就和他谈谈。
If you dropped the glass, it would break. 你要是把杯子掉下来，会打碎的。
If she had time, she could help me. 她要是有时间，就会帮我了。
②should do
条件从句中不管什么人称都用should do，可表示有偶然实现的可能性。
If it should rain, the crops could be saved. 假如下雨，庄稼可能就有救了。
We would trust him if he should be honest. 如果他真是诚实的，那我们就相信他。
③were to do
条件从句用were + to do。这种形式比较正式，常出现在书面语中，其假设成份很大，实
现的可能性很小。
If I were to do the work, I should do it in a different way.
要是我做这项工作，我就会以不
同的方式去做。
If the headmaster were to come, what would we say to him
假如校长来了，我们对他说什
么呢？
对比：
将来不太可能实现的三种非真实条件句中的虚拟语气对比
If it snowed tomorrow, I would stay at home. 如果明天下雪的话，我就留在家里。
（常用形式）
If it should snow tomorrow, I would stay at home. 如果明天下雪的话，我就留在家里。
（可能性较小）
If it were to snow tomorrow, I would stay at home.
如果明天要下雪的话，我就留在家里。
3
（可能性最小）
C．省略if 的条件句
在书面语中，非真实条件句中有were, had, should 时，可以省略if，而把were, had, should
放在主语前，用倒装结构。
Were it necessary, I might go without delay. 如果需要的话，我可以立即去。（= If it were
necessary......）
Had you taken my advice, you wouldn't have failed in the exam. 你要是听了我的建议，就
不会考试不及格了。（= If you had taken my advice......）
Should I have time, I would call on her.
要是有时间，我就去看她。（= If I should have
time......）
D．错综条件句
虚拟条件句中的主句和从句涉及的动作发生的时间不一致，这时主句和从句的谓语形式
应按照各自动作发生的实际时间来表达。
If you hadn't watched TV yesterday, you wouldn't be so sleepy now. 如果你昨天不看电视，
你现在也就不会这么困了。（从句yesterday 说明过去，主句now 说明现在）
If they had left home early this morning, they would arrive in half an hour.
如果他们今天
一早就离开家的话，再过半小时他们就该到了。（从句说明过去，主句说明将来。）
If you hesitated this moment, you might suffer in the future. 如果你此刻犹豫不决，你将来
会吃苦头的。（从句说明现在，主句说明将来）
注意：
在很多情况下，我们也可以用was 来代替当主语是第一人称或第三人称单数时的were。
If were here tomorrow...
也可以说成：If he was here tomorrow...
I wish I were a bird.
也可以说成：I sish I was a bird.
但倒装句型中的were 不可被was 来替换。
Were I in your position,I would not do it. 如果我处在你的位置，我是不会干这件事的。
E．含蓄条件句
非真实条件句中的条件从句有时不表达出来，只暗含在上下文中，这种句子叫做含蓄条
件句。含蓄条件句大体有三种情况：
1．条件暗含在短语中
He would not get such a result without your help. 没有你的帮助，他就不会有今天的成果。
(条件暗含在介词短语without your help 中)
But for you, I could not be recovered so soon. 要不是有你，我就不会恢复得这么快。(条件
暗含在But for you 中)
This same thing, happening in the past, would lead to a disaster. 同样的事，如发生在过
去，就会酿成大祸。(条件暗含在分词短语happening in the past 中)
He must have been there, or he never could know the place so well. 他一定是去过那儿，
否则他绝不会对那个地方如此熟悉。(暗含条件是连词or)
2 ．条件可根据上下文推理出
It would do you no good. 这可能会对你没好处。(条件可能是if you should give up the job
如果你放弃这项工作的话)
They could have won. 他们本来是会赢的。(条件可能是if they had been patient 如果他
们有耐心的话)
Such mistakes could have been avoided.
这种错误完全能避免。（条件可能是if you had
been more careful 如果你更加小心一点的话）
Why didn't you tell me about it I should have helped you. 为什么你不告诉我？我会帮助你
的。（条件可能是if you had told me about it 如果你当时告诉我的话）
--- Did you go to see him yesterday 你昨天去看他了吗？
--- I would have, but someone dropped over to my house for a visit. 原想去的，但有人到我
家来玩了。（条件是if no one had dropped over to my house for a visit 如果没人到我家来玩
3
的话）
3．条件用其他形式来表示
She was ill, otherwise she would have been present at the meeting.
她病了，否则的话就会
出席会议了。（条件通过连词otherwiseor 表示出来If she had not been ill...）
I told him to go there himself, but perhaps I should have gone together with him. 我让他自
己去那里，但也许我应该和他一道去。（连词but 暗示条件）
Suppose you were in my shoes, what would you do
假若你站在我的立场上，你会怎么办？
（用supposesupposingproviding 等词表示if）
To talk with her, you would know she could not hear well. 如果你同她交谈，你就会知道她
的听力不好。（动词不定式带有假设的意思，相当于If you should talk with her...）
Left to himself, he could not have finished the work. 要是放任他的话，他是不可能完成工
作的。（动词的-ed 形式表示条件If he had been left to himself...）
提示：
在很多情况下，虚拟式已变成习惯说法，很难找出其暗含的条件。
You wouldn't know. 你不会知道。
I would like to go with you. 我愿意和你一起去。
三、虚拟语气在各种从句中的用法
虚拟语气除主要用于非真实条件句外，还可用在部分主语从句、宾语从句、表语从句、同
位语从句、定语从句和状语从句之中。
A．名词性从句中的虚拟语气
主句中的动词、名词、形容词如表示要求、建议、命令或愿望等含义，与其相关的名词
性从句（主语从句、宾语从句、表语从句和同位语从句）中的谓语动词要用虚拟语气。
1．主语从句中的虚拟语气
主语从句通常用于“It is +形容词名词动词的-ed 形式+ that ...”结构。主语从句中是否用
虚拟语气取决于所用的形容词或动词的-ed 形式，其谓语动词常用“should +动词原形”（美
国英语常省略should，只用动词原形）。
①表示建议或命令
It is important that we (should) work out a study plan.
重要的是我们要制订出一个学习计
划。
It will be better that we (should) meet some other time. 最好我们在另一个时间见面。
It is suggested that each student (should) sing a song in English.
有人建议每个学生都要唱
一首英文歌曲。
It is demanded that he should leave at once. 要求他立刻离开。
②表示惊讶
It is strange that he should have failed to see his own shortcomings.
真奇怪他竟看不到自
己的缺点。
It is a pityshame that I should be at school instead of lying here in hospital. 真可惜，我应当
在学校而不是躺在医院里。
It is natural that you should forget it first. 你起先记不住是很自然的。
必背：
常见的要接含有虚拟语气主语从句的词
形容词：important, necessary, urgent, essential, vital, natural, strange, proper 等
动词的-ed 形式：arranged, suggested, ordered, required, desired, demanded, proposed 等
It is necessary that the program (should) be loaded into the computer.
有必要把程序输入
电脑。
It is strange that he should have learned so much in such a short time.
很奇怪他竟然在如
此短的时间内学了那么多的东西。
It is desired that we (should) get everything ready by tonight. 希望一切在今晚前准备就绪。
2．宾语从句
虚拟语气常用在表示要求、建议、命令或愿望的动词后的宾语从句中。
常见的宾语从句中需用“should+动词原形”的动词有：
3
一个坚持：insist
两个命令：order,command
三个建议：suggest,advise,propose
四个要求：demand,require,ask,desire
①在suggest（建议）, order(命令), propose(建议), insist（坚持要做）, command (命令)，
request（要求），advise（建议）等动词后的宾语从句中，谓语动词用should +动词原形（美
国英语常省略should）。
The examination instructor asked that the students (should) not use a calculator. 考官要求
学生不要使用计算器。
The workers demanded that their wages (should) be raised by 10 percent. 工人们要求增加
百分之十的工资。
They requested that he (should) sing a song. 他们要求他唱一首歌。
比较：
动词suggest 和insist 后面的宾语从句，应根据不同情况选用陈述语气或虚拟语气。
suggest 作“建议”解时，用虚拟语气，作“使想起、暗示”解时，用陈述语气。
His silence suggested that he agreed with my decision. 他的沉默暗示他赞同我的决定。（暗
示）
He suggested that I (should) stick to my decision. 他建议我坚持自己的决定。（建议）
insist 作“坚决要求”解时，用虚拟语气，作“坚持认为”解时，用陈述语气。
He insists that doing morning exercises does good to people's health.
他坚持认为做早操对
健康有益。（强调）
He insists that he (should) do morning exercises every day. 他坚持每天都要做早操。
（要求）
②在动词wish 后的宾语从句中用虚拟语气，表示不可能实现的愿望。
一般过去时weredid 表示目前不可能实现的愿望
I wish I were a bird. 但愿我是一只小鸟。
I wish I knew the answer. 我要是知道答案就好了。
过去完成时 had done 表示过去不可能实现的愿望
I wish she had taken my advice. 那时她要是接受我的建议就好了。
I wish that I had seen her yesterday. 真希望我昨天见过她。
过去将来时wouldcould do 表示将来没有把握或不可能实现的愿望
I wish you would stay an hour longer. 我希望你再呆一个小时。
I wish it could stop raining. 但愿雨能停。
提示：
由于wish 和hope 的汉语意思差不多，在使用上往往容易出错。wish 一般表示“希望”、
“但愿”，表示不可能实现的愿望，后接从句时要用虚拟语气；hope 表示“希望”，指可
以实现的希望，后接从句时用陈述语气。
The students hope that their football team will win the game.
学生们希望他们的足球队获
胜。（可能实现）
I wish I could see him now. 我希望现在就能看到他。（不可能实现）
3．表语从句和同位语从句中的虚拟语气
在表示建议、劝告、命令等含义的名词后的表语从句和同位语从句中，谓语动词要用
“should +动词原形”结构。
My advice is that you (should) practise speaking English as often as possible.
我的建议是
你尽可能经常地练习说英语。
The demand is that the composition (should) be written on one side only.
按照要求作文必
须单面誊写。
It is my desire that all the members of the family (should) gather once a year.
我的愿望是
所有家庭成员一年团圆一次。
The suggestion that education (should) be reformed is reasonable.
教育要改革的建议是合
理的。
必背：
3
表示建议、劝告、命令等含义的名词常见的有
advice
建议
demand
要求
desire
愿望
decision 决定
idea
意见
motion
提议
order 命令
proposal 提议
requirement
要求
request
请求
regulation 规章
suggestion
建议
B．状语从句中的虚拟语气
①方式状语从句
由as if 或as though 引导的状语从句可以用陈述语气表示可能符合事实的情况，也可以用
虚拟语气表示与事实不符或与事实相反的情况。
a. 表示与现在事实不相符，用一般过去时
The teacher treats the pupil as if he were her own child.
这位老师对待这位学生就像自己
的亲生孩子一样。（这位学生并不是她的亲生孩子）
b. 表示与过去事实不相符，用过去完成时
I felt as though we had known each other for years. 我感觉我们好像认识多年了。（其实并
没有认识多年）
c. 表示与将来事实不相符，用wouldmightcould
It looks as if it might rain. 天看上去好像要下雨。（不大可能下雨）
对比：
He looks as if he is young. 看样子他好像很年轻。（他就是年轻）
He looks as if he were young. 看样子他好像很年轻。（实际上他不年轻）
②目的状语从句
a. 由in case, lest, for fear that 引导的目的状语从句，动词用“should +动词原形”结构，
表示忧虑或目的。
Please remind me of it again tomorrow in case I (should) forget.
请你明天再提醒我这件
事，以免我忘记。
She emphasized it again and again, lest he (should) forget. 她一再强调这一点免得他忘记。
We had a meeting and talked the matter over face to face for fear that there
should be any misunderstanding.
我们开了一个会，面对面谈了这件事，以免发生任何误会.
b. 在in order that 和so that 引导的目的状语从句中，往往用can(could)或may(might)。
I shall write down your telephone number so that I may not forget. 我要把你的电话号码记
下来，以免忘记。
They worked harder than usual in order that they could finish the work ahead of time.
为
了能提前完成工作，他们比往常更加努力。
We will tell you the truth so that you can judge for yourself. 我把真实情况告诉你，使你能
自己作出判断。
③让步状语从句
让步状语从句指事实时，从句谓语动词用陈述语气。若从句内容表示现在和将来的假设
情况，从句谓语动词用虚拟语气。
Though he (should) fail, there would still be hope. 即使他失败了，仍有一线希望。
I should say the same thing even if he were here. 即使他在这里，我还是要这么说。
Whether he (should) succeed or fail, we shall have to do our part. 不管他成功还是失败，我
们还是要做好自己的事。
3
However hard it might rain rains, we shall go there together. 不管雨下得多么大，今晚我们
还是要去那里。
No matter what his social position (might) be, a man is equal in the eye of the law.
一个人
不论其社会地位如何，在法律面前都是平等的。
C．定语从句中的虚拟语气
在It is (high) time (that) ...结构中，定语从句的谓语动词用过去式，表示“到某人该做某
事的时间了”。
It is time that the children went to bed. 到孩子们睡觉的时间了。
It is high time that we began the meeting. 正是我们开会的时间了。
四、其他句型中的虚拟语气
A．If only......
If only
位于句首引起的感叹句用虚拟语气，动词用一般过去时表示目前的愿望，用过去
完成时表示过去的愿望，用would 或could 表示将来。
If only he knew the answer. 他要是知道答案就好了。（用过去时表示现在）
If only I could speak several foreign languages
！我要是能讲几种外语就好了！（用
wouldcould 表示将来）
If only you had told me the truth before.
要是你以前告诉我真相就好了。（用过去完成
时表示过去）
注意：if only 和wish 的用法相同，表示的意愿也基本相同。
If only it would rain. 但愿天能下点儿雨！= How I wish it would rain.
If only I had known her earlier!
要是我早点儿认识她就好了！= I wish I had known her
earlier.
B．would rather
would rather, would prefer, would sooner 等后接从句，表示“宁愿”，动词用过去时表示
当时和将来的情况，用过去完成时表示过去的情况。
I would rather you left today. 我宁可你今天走。
I would prefer he didn't stay here too long. 我倒希望他不要在这儿呆得太久。
I would rather I hadn't seen that film yesterday. 我宁愿昨天没有看那场电影。
提示：
would rather 主要有两种用法。
1 ．后接不带to 的不定式
I'd rather play tennis than swim. 我宁愿打网球，也不愿游泳。
I'd rather not go to the movies. 我宁愿不去看电影。
Which would you rather have, tea or coffee 你喜欢喝茶，还是咖啡
2 ．后接不用连词的that 从句
I'd rather you went home now. 我希望你现在就回家。
I would rather my daughter attended a public school. 我希望我的女儿能上公立学校。
C．表示愿望的感叹句
在表示祝愿的感叹句中，用动词原形，表示愿望。
Long live the People's Republic of China! 中华人民共和国万岁！
May you be happy! 祝您快乐！
God bless you! 上帝保佑你！
Success attend you! 祝你成功！
The Lord save us! 愿主救我们！
D．情态动词用于虚拟语气
部分情态动词的过去形式（could, might, should, would），可以用于非真实条件句以及其
他结构中表示虚拟语气。
1．表示想像或猜测
If I could speak French, I would teach you. 如果我会说法语，我就能教你。（我不会，所以
不能教你）
3
If you phoned him right now, you might get the matter settled. 如果你现在给他打电话，你
就可以把问题解决了。
There could be something wrong with the tape recorder. 这台录音机可能出毛病了。
He might have said so. 他可能这样说过。
Could he have done such a foolish thing 他会做这样的傻事吗？
2．表示委婉或客气
虚拟语气（could, would, might +动词原形）可使说话者的口气变得委婉客气。
You could answer this email for me. 你可以替我回这个电子邮件。
Could you leave me your telephone number and address
你能将电话号码和地址留给我
吗？
Would you mind opening the window 劳驾把窗子打开，好吗？
You might as well put off the discussion till next week. 你们不妨把讨论推迟到下个星期。
比较：
would lide to do
愿意，想要
would lide to have done
本来想
I would like (to have) a word with you. 我想和你谈一谈。(现在想)
I would like to have talked with you. 我原本想和你谈一谈的。（没有谈成）
3．表示惋惜或责备
Given more time, we could have done better. 如果给我们更多时间，我们能够干得更好些。
（我们并没有得到更多的时间）
You could have got up a little earlier ！你完全可以早点儿起来！（实际上没有早起）
It was cold yesterday. I should have worn a heavy coat. 昨天很冷，我该穿件厚外套的。（但
我没穿）
This wall shouldn't have been pained blue. 这墙不应该漆成蓝色。（但已漆了）
提示：
当代英语一个显著的变化就是虚拟语气的使用越来越少，许多该用虚拟语气的地方都用
陈述语气代替。
He suggested that I went to the hospital at once.
他建议我们立刻去医院。（原应用should
go）
We shall write down the address lest we forget. 我们要把地址记下来，以免忘记。（原应用
should forget）
Imagine you are an astronaut. 设想你是个宇航员。（原应用were）
3
第四章 情态动词（一）
情态动词表示说话人对动作或状态的各种观点和态度，如需要、猜测、意愿或怀疑等。
情态动词有词义，但不完全，是所谓的“辅助性”动词，在句中不能单独充当谓语。
一、 情态动词的特征和形式
A.情态动词的各种形式见下表：
情态动词
maymightcancould must have toought to will would shal should need dare used to
否定式 may not might not cannotcan notcould not must not do not have to oughtnot to
will notwould not shall not should not need nodare not used not todid not use to
简略否定式
mayn't （老式英语，现在不常见） mightn't can't couldn't mustn't don't have to
oughtn't to （否定句中to 可省略） won't wouldn'shan't（只用于英国英语）shouldn't
needn't daren'tusedn't todidn't use to
B．情态动词除ought to, used to 等外，后面只接不带to 的不定式。
1．情态动词+do
You shouldn't be so careless. 你不该这样粗心大意。
Jessica told him yesterday she might not go on the trip.
杰西卡昨天告诉他，她可能不去旅行了。
Difficulties can and must be overcome.
困难能够而且必须克服。
2．情态动词+be doing
She must be listening to pop music.
她肯定在听流行音乐。
You should be reviewing your lessons.
你应该在复习功课。
My mother maymight be cooking now.
我妈妈可能正在做饭。
3．情态动词+have done
They might have visited the Great Wall.
他们可能参观过长城了。
He must have got up very early to catch the train.
他一定起得很早去赶火车了。
You ought to have come earlier.
4
你本该早一点儿来。
4．情态动词+be done
This word can also be used as a verb.
这个词也可以用作动词。
Something must be done to stop pollution.
必须采取措施来制止污染。
The work ought to have been finished long ago.
这工作早就该完成了。
C. 情态动词第三人称单数一般现在时没有词形变化。
You ought to wear a raincoat.
你应该穿件雨衣。
She ought to wear a raincoat.
她应该穿件雨衣。
Plants must have oxygen in order to live.
为了存活植物必须有氧气。
A plant must have oxygen in order to live.
为了存活植物必须有氧气。
D.情态动词的时态并不是区分时间的主要标志。在一些场合中，情态动词的现在式和过去
式都可以表示现在时间、过去时间或将来时间。
I'm afraid it might rain tonight.
我看今晚可能要下雨。
Could I borrow your thermos
我可以借用你的暖水瓶吗？
It's a nice day today. We could go for a walk.
今天天气不错，我们可以出去散散步。
E. 情态动词是互相排斥的，一般不允许两个意义相近的情态动词连用。
【误】Soldiers must have to obey orders.
【正】Soldiers have to obey orders.
军人必须服从命令。
【正】Soldiers must obey orders.
军人必须服从命令。
【误】Can I be able to borrow two books at a time
【正】Can I borrow two books at a time
我能一次借两本书吗？
【正】Will I be able to borrow two books at a time
我能一次借两本书吗？
一、 情态动词的意义和用法
A. may 和might
1．表示请求、许可，常译为“可以”。
在口语中可用can, could 代替may，但在正式场合用may。表示允许时，也可用might
代替，might 不表示过去时，而是表示口气比较婉转。
You may take this seat if you like.
如果你喜欢可以坐这个位置。
MayCan Could Might I have a talk with you
我可以和你谈谈吗？
--- MayMight I come into the room to see my mother
我可以进房间看我母亲吗？
--- No, you mustn't. She needs to have a good rest.
不，你不能进。她需要好好休息。
提示：
May I ...问句常见的肯定回答和否定回答。
肯定回答
4
Yes, please.Certainly.Yes, of course.Sure.Go ahead, please.
否定回答
No, you can't.（最常见）No, you mustn't.（具有强烈禁止的意思）
Please don't. You'd better not.I don't think you can.I'm sorry it's not allowed.
2 ．表示推测，可译为“可能，也许”。
Your math teacher maymight be in his office. 你们的数学老师可能在办公室里。（一
般情况下，might 表示的可能性很小）
The light isn't on. It maymight be broken.
那盏灯没有亮，它可能坏了。
There may might be some ink left in the bottle.
瓶子里也许还剩点儿墨水。
注意：
用may 表示推测一般不用于疑问句，在疑问句中通常用can 来代替。
Can he be at home
他可能在家吗？
--- Can it be true
这可能是真的吗？
--- It may be, or may not be.
可能是，也可能不是。
3．用在目的状语从句中，构成谓语。
He wants to take a taxi so that he may get there in time.
他想坐出租车，这样他就能及时到达那里。
I arrived at the airport earlier in order that I might meet him.
我早早地就到了机场为了能接到他。
4．有时可以用于祈使句表示祝愿。
May you succeed.
祝你成功
May you be happy.
祝你快乐。
May that day come soon.
希望这一天早日到来。
B. can 和could
1 ．表示能力，可译为“能，会”。
I can swim. 我会游泳。
Emily can dance well and her mother could dance well when she was young.
艾米丽舞跳得很好，她妈妈年轻时舞跳得也很好。
The cinema can seat 1,000 people.
这电影院能容纳1，000 人。
I could not read such an easy book when I was 7 years old.
我七岁时连如此简单的书我也看不懂。
2．表示允许、许可，常用在口语中。could 比can 语气上要客气。
--- Could I use your dictionary
我可以用一下你的字典吗？
---Yes, go ahead.
可以，用吧。（或Yes, you can.但不能说Yes, you could.）
Could Can you tell me how to get to the zoo
劳驾，你能告诉我怎么去动物园吗？
He asked me whether he could take the book out of the reading room.
他问我可不可以把书带出阅览室。
3．表示推测，可用于肯定句（can 罕见）、否定句和疑问句，但更常见于疑问句或否定句。
在此种用法中can 和could 没有时态的区别，只是表示可能性的大小，can 表示推测的可能
性比could 大。
4
Can he be ill at home
他会是生病在家吗？
Can the story be true
这个故事会是真的吗？
He cannot be at home.
他不可能在家。
You mustn't smoke while you are walking around in the woods. You could start a fire.
在林子里走时一定不要吸烟，那样可能会引起火灾。
4 ．表示惊异、怀疑、不相信等态度，主要用于否定句和疑问句中。
How can you be so careless
你怎么这么粗心？
Where can could they have gone
他们会去了哪里？
He can'tcouldn't be over sixty.
他不可能超过60 岁。
5．Could 可以用在虚拟条件句中。
If I could fly, I should be very happy.
如果我能飞，我会很高兴。
If you had followed my advice, you could have finished it.
如果你当时听我的，你早就做完了。
If you had tried harder, you could have passed your exam.
如果你再努力些，你就能通过考试了。
６．can 与be able to 的区别
①can 表示“能力”时，和be able to 相当，许多场合都可以互相替换。但当叙述过去经过
一番努力才能完成的事情或前面有特殊说明，表示你有能力时，只能用be able to。
【正】Can you speak any foreign languages
你会说外语吗？
【正】Are you able to speak any foreign languages
你会说外语吗？
【误】The fire spread the building quickly but everybody could escape.
【正】The fire spread the building quickly but everybody was able to escape.
大火迅速蔓延到整幢大楼，但大家都逃了出来。
【正】The fire spread the building quickly but everybody managed to escape.
大火迅速蔓延到整幢大楼，但大家都想法逃了出来。
②be able to 比can 有更多形式。
No one could answer the question.
没人能回答这个问题。（这里could 可用was able to 代替）
When he grows up, he will be able to support his family.
他长大后就能养家了。
Frank is ill. He hasn't been able to go to school for one week.
弗兰克病了，已经一周没去上学了。
I'm sorry for not being able to help you in time.
对不起，不能及时帮你的忙。
③could 经常和动词see, hear, smell, taste, feel, remember, understand 等连用。
When we went into the house, we could smell something burning.
当我们走进屋子时，我们闻到什么东西烧焦了。（不用was able to）
She spoke in a very low voice, but I could understand what she said.
虽然她讲话的声音很低，但我还是明白了她说的话。
④在谈论说话时发生的动作，用can，不用be able to。
【误】Look! I'm able to swim.
【正】Look! I can swim.
看，我会游泳了！
4
C．must 和have to
1．must 表示有做某一动作的必要或义务，强调主观看法，可译为“必须，应该”。
Everyone must obey the rule.
人人都必须遵守制度。
We must do everything step by step.
我们必须逐步做每件事。
Teachers must be patient enough with their students.
老师必须对学生有足够的耐心。
2 ．have to 表示因客观需要促使主语不得不做某事。
You can't turn right here. You have to turn left.
你不能在这里右拐，你必须左拐。
My eyesight is very poor. I have to wear glasses for reading.
我的视力很差，看书时不得不戴眼镜。
You have to pass a test before you can get a driving licence.
你在取得驾照之前必须先通过考试。
提示：
在口语中，我们可以使用have got to 来代替have to.
I've got to work on Sunday.
我不得不星期天工作。
When has Ann got to go
安必须什么时候走？
3．must 与have to 的比较。
must 与have to 在表示“必须”这个意思时意义相近，但在用法上有所区别。
①must 含有说话者的强烈决意（表示主观的看法），have to 则表示外力环境或习惯使然
（即表示客观的必要，作“不得不”解）。
I must study hard.
我必须努力学习。（发自内心的决定）
I have to study hard.
我不得不努力学习。（外界因素逼迫）
You must stay for supper.
你必须留下来吃晚饭。（because I want you to）
You have to stay for supper.
你得留下来吃晚饭。（because there is nowhere else to go）
②must 只有一种形式，而have to 可有多种时态。
They had to put off the sports meet due to the bad weather.
由于坏天气，他们不得不推迟运动会。
These last two days he has had to take a rest at home.
这两天他必须一直在家休息。
③must 的否定式和have to 的否定式的意思完全不同。
You must keep it a secret. You mustn't tell anyone.
你必须保密，你不可以告诉任何人。（mustn't 表示“禁止”）
You don't have to tell me the secret. 你不必告诉我这个秘密。
（don't have to 意思是“没有必要”= don't need to）
4．must 用于表示推测，它的肯定程度比may, might, could 大得多，一般只用于肯定句。
①must do (这里的do 通常是状态动词或系动词)，表示对现在状态的推测。
He must be very lazy for his desk is very untidy.
他肯定很懒，因为他的课桌很不整洁。
Carol must get very bored with her job. She does the same thing every day.
卡罗尔肯定对她的工作厌烦了，她每天都做同样的事。
②must be doing 表示对现在动作或状态的推测。
Put on more clothes. You must be feeling cold with only a shirt on.
多穿点儿衣服，你只穿一件衬衣，肯定觉得冷。
③must have done 表示对过去的动作或状态的推测。
4
The ground is wet. It must have rained last night.
地面是湿的，昨晚肯定下雨了。
I didn't hear the phone. I must have been asleep.
我没听见电话铃响，我一定是睡着了。
提示：
must 表示推测只用于肯定句，否定句和疑问句要用can, could 来代替must。
He's just had his lunch. He can't be hungry already.
他刚吃过午饭，不会饿的。
They have just arrived here. They can't know many people.
他们刚到这里，不可能认识很多人。
Leslie walked past me without speaking. He can'tcouldn't have seen me.
莱斯利从我身边走过而没打招呼，他肯定没看见我。
5．must 可用来表示根据逻辑推理必然要发生的事，可译为“必然会，总是会”。
We all must die.
我们都会死。
Truth must be out.
真相必然会大白的。
Winter must be followed by spring.
冬天到了，春天还会远吗？
6 ．must 有时可用来表示“偏偏”的意思。
Why must it rain today
为什么偏偏在今天下雨？
When I was taking a nap, a student must knock at the door.
正当我午睡时，偏偏一个学生在这个时候来敲门。
D．will 和would
1.will 和would 可用于第二人称疑问句，表示请求和建议等。would 比will 委婉客气。
Will you have some tea
你喝点茶，好吗？
Will you share your happiness with us
你可以把你的欢乐与我们共享吗？
Would you pass this book to the student in the last row
请你把这本书传给最后一排的学生好吗？
必背：
WillWould you ... 表示请求和建议的答复。
肯定回答
Yes, please. 是的，请。Certainly.当然可以。 Sure.当然了。 All right.好啊！
否定回答
I'm sorry. I can't.
对不起，不行。 No, thank you. 不，不行。 No, I
won't.不，不行。
2．will 和would 可表示意志、愿望和决心，用于各种人称陈述句。
I will do anything for you.
我愿为你做任何事。
I will never tell you the secret.
我永远不会告诉你这个秘密。
None is so blind as those who won't see.
不愿看的人眼睛最瞎。
They would not let him in because he was poorly dressed.
他们不让他进去因为他衣着破旧。
3 ．will 和would 可表示某种倾向或习惯性动作。will 表示现在的习惯动作，would 表示
过去的习惯动作。
He will surf the Internet every night.
他每天晚上都在上网。
The boy will sit there hour after hour looking at the traffic go by.
4
那男孩常常坐在那儿好几个钟头，看着车辆行人通过。
He would be nervous when he met strangers.
遇见陌生人时他总是很紧张。
In class he would ask some silly questions, and his classmates would laugh at him.
课上，他总是问一些蠢问题，他的同学们总是嘲笑他。
4．will 可表示固执坚持，这时will 不可使用'll 的简略形式。用于非人称主语时，表示物
体的固有性质和倾向。
I will take the job, and no one can stop me.
我就要这个工作，没有人可阻止我。
He won't do what he's told.
他就是不愿按所吩咐的去做。
The window won't open.
窗子打不开。
This glass will not crack under heavy pressure.
这种玻璃在重压下也不会破碎。
5 ．will 表示将来时间时，不可用于条件状语从句，但will 表示意愿或决心时，可用于条
件状语从句。
If you will read the book, I'll lend it to you.
如果你愿意读这本书，我会把它借给你。
If you will give up smoking, your health will improve.
如果你愿意把烟戒掉的话，你的健康状况就会好转。
6 ．will 和would 可表示推论或猜测。
The patient took the sleeping pills an hour ago. He will be asleep now.
病人一小时前吃的安眠药，现在应该睡着了。
It would be about ten when he left home.
他大约在十点钟离开的家。
I thought he would have told you about it.
我认为他已告知你此事。
It would be raining when she went home.
她回家时可能正在下雨。
比较：
Would you like ... 表示邀请
Do you like ... 表示习惯
——Do you like going go the cinema
你喜欢看电影吗？
——Yes,I go to the cinema a lot.
是的，我经常去看电影。
——Would you like to go to the cinema tonight
今天晚上去看电影好吗？
——Yes,I'd love to.
非常乐意。
E ．shall 和should
1．shall
①表示征询意见或请求指示，用于一、三人称疑问句。
Shall I carry it for you
我来帮你搬它，好吗？
Shall we sing a song
我们唱一支歌，好吗？
Shall they wait outside
让他们在外面等吗？
Shall the waiter bring meals to your room
要服务员把饭送到你房间去吗？
4
提示：
Shall I open the window
我打开窗子好吗？
Will you open the window
你打开窗子好吗？
Shall he open the window
他打开窗子好吗？
②表示说话人的意愿，有“命令、允诺、警告、决心”等意思，用于第二、三人称陈述
句中。
You shall do as I say.
按我说的做。（命令）
He shall be sorry for it one day, I tell you.
我告诉你，总有一天他会后悔的。（警告）
You shall fall behind in your exam if you keep playing.
如果你一直玩，你就会在考试中落后。
Nothing shall stop us from carrying out the plan.
什么也阻止不了我们执行这项计划。（决心）
He shall have the book when I finish reading.
我看完这本书就给他看。（允诺）
I shall do my homework after reading this story book.
读完这本故事书后我就做作业。
2 ．should
①表示义务，意为“应该”（某件事宜于做），用于各种人称。
Children should obey their parents.
儿童应该服从他们的父母。
One shouldn't be selfish.
人千万别自私。
Customers who get bad service should complain, shouldn't they
没有得到满意服务的顾客应该抱怨，不是吗？
②常与what, how, why 等词连用，表示意外、惊讶等情绪。
How should I know
我怎么会知道呢
Why should I fear
我为什么会害怕？
What should she do but cry for help
除了呼救外，她还能干什么？
I don't know why you should think I did it.
我真不知道你凭什么认为这件事是我干的。
③表示对过去、现在或将来情况的某种推测，可译为“可能、照说应该”。
It should be fine tomorrow.
明天可能天是晴天。
He should be taking a bath now.
他可能在洗澡。
It's nearly seven o'clock. Jack should be here at any moment.
已经快七点了，杰克随时都可能到这儿。
The film should be very good as it is starring first-class actors.
这部新电影是一流演员主演的，估计拍得很好。
④表示对现在或以前的动作的责怪、批评（应做的事却没做）。
The boys shouldn't be playing football. They should be at school.
这些男孩子不应该在踢足球，他们应该在上课。
You shouldn't have entered the teachers' office without permission.
没有允许你们不应该进老师办公室。
4
F．ought to
1 ．表示义务，意为“应该”（因责任、义务而该做），口气比should 稍重。
We ought to defend our country.
我们应当保卫我们的国家。（每一个公民应尽的义务）
You ought to respect your parents.
你应当尊敬你的父母。
Oughtn't we to do everything possible to stop pollution
难道我们不应当尽可能地制止污染吗？
2 ．表示推测，暗含很大的可能，可译为“应该是，会是”。
Prices ought to come down soon.
价格可能会很快下跌。
Han Mei ought to know his telephone number.
韩梅该知道他的电话号码。
There's a fine sunset; it ought to be a fine day tomorrow.
今天有晚霞，明天应该是个好天。
3 ．ought to 和should 一样，表示对现在或以前应做的事却没做的责怪、批评。
You ought to be washing your clothes. Why are you playing Ping-Pong
你应该在洗衣服（可是你没洗）。为什么你在打乒乓球？
You ought to have handed in the exercise last week.
你上周就应当交练习。（可你没交，含责备的意思。）
He ought to have asked me before he took my bike.
他在用我自行车之前应该和我讲一声。
4 ．ought to 与should 的比较。
ought to 和should 的含义较近，但不完全相同。ought to 表示“应该”，是从“义务”或
“按理推断”的角度来讲的。should 则是从说话人的个人看法这一角度来讲的。
You are her mother. You ought to look after her.
你是她的母亲，你应当照管她。（是道义上的责任，不能和should 互换。）
We should encourage him for we are his classmates.
我们应该鼓励他，我们是他的同班同学啊！
提示：
表示“义务”时，我们在口语中可以用had better或be supposed to来代替should和ought
to。
If you are not well, you had better ask Alice to go instead.
如果你不舒服，你最好叫艾丽丝代替你去。
I'm supposed to be there at 8 o'clock.
我应该八点到那里。
G．used to
1 ．used to 表示过去的习惯或过去某时期的状况，但现在已不存在。
He used to drink tea but now he drinks coffee.
他过去总是喝茶但现在他喝咖啡了。（强调现在不喝茶了）
I know where there used to be a river here.
我知道这儿以前哪里有条河。（现在没有河了）
When I was a child I didn't use to like tomatoes.
我小时候不喜欢吃西红柿。
He is not what he used to be.
他已不是原来的他了。
Where did you use to live before you came here
来此之前你住在什么地方？
2 ．would 和used to 的用法区别。
①used to 表示过去与现在或过去某时与后来的情况有不同，强调“现已无此习惯了”，
4
而would 只表示过去的情况，与现在无关。
When he was young, he would smoke a lot.
他年轻时总是吸许多烟。（不含有和现在比较，现在他也许还在抽，也许不抽了。）
He used to live in the country, but now he lives in the city. 他过去住在乡下，现在住在城里。
②used to 可表示过去的习惯动作或状态，而would 只表示过去的习惯动作。
Kate used to be very thin.
以前凯特非常瘦。
There used to be a building at the street corner, but it has been pulled down.
街道拐角处过去有座楼房，现在拆了。（不用would）
③used to 可泛指过去的习惯动作或状态，而would 表示过去的习惯动作时，往往要带有
一个特定的时间状语。
【误】We would play hide-and-seek in the fields.
【正】We used to play hide-and-seek in the fields.
我们过去常在田野里玩捉迷藏。
【正】Whenever we were in the country, we would play hide-and-seek in the fields.
每当我们在乡下，我们都在田野里玩捉迷藏。
H．dare
dare 既可用作情态动词，也可用作行为动词，指勇气和胆量上的可能，可译为“敢”。
1 ．情态动词dare
①dare 作为情态动词时主要用于疑问句和否定句，一般不用于肯定句中。
I dare not daren't walk through the forest at night.
我不敢在黑夜穿过森林。
--- Dare you walk through the forest at night
你敢在黑夜穿过森林吗？
--- Yes, I dare.
是的，我敢。
--- No, I daren't.
不，我不敢。
He dare not drive too fast on the rainy day.
下雨天他不敢开得太快。
He dared not do it last year.
去年他不敢做这事。（dare 的过去时为dared）
②可以用于表示怀疑的名词性从句中。
I wonder how he dare say such things.
我真奇怪他怎么竟敢说出这样的话。
We don't know whether he dare climb the mountain.
我们不知道他是否敢爬那座山。
③可以用于条件状语从句中。
If the enemy dare enter the village, we'll fight against them to the end.
如果敌人敢进入村里，我们就和他们战斗到底。
If you dare cheat in your exam, I will give you some punishment.
如果你们敢在考试中作弊，我就惩罚你们。
2．行为动词dare
①dare 可以作为行为动词，多用于肯定句中，但也可用在疑问句和否定句中
He will dare any danger.
他敢面对任何危险。
He dared me to jump over the stream.
他激我跳过小溪。
Did anyone dare to admit it
有人敢于承认吗？
I have never dared (to) go back to take a look.
4
我再也不敢返回去看一眼了。（否定句中to 可省略）
②和其他行为动词一样，dare 在句子中要随着主语的人称和数发生变化。
He doesn't dare to walk at night.
他不敢走夜路。（作行为动词）
He daren't walk at night.
他不敢走夜路。（作情态动词）
Does he dare to walk at night
他敢走夜路吗？（作行为动词）
Dare he walk at night
他敢走夜路吗？（作情态动词）
He didn't dare to walk at night fifteen years ago.
15 年前他不敢走夜路。（作行为动词）
He daren't walk (=dared not walk) at night fifteen years ago.
15 年前他不敢走夜路。（作情态动词）
Will you dare to do the same experiment tomorrow
明天你敢做同样的实验吗？（作行为动词）
Dare you do the same experiment tomorrow ？
明天你敢做同样的实验吗？（作情态动词）
必背：
英语口语中dare 的几个常用结构：
●I dare say...
我想,大概,可能,或许……
I dare say things will improve.
我想情况会好转的。
●How dare you ...
你怎么敢……？
How dare you ask me such a question
你怎么敢问我这样的问题？
●I dare you ...
我谅你也不敢……
I dare you to tell your parents!
我谅你也不敢告诉你父母！
I．need
1 ．情态动词need
need 和dare 一样，作为情态动词时，主要用于否定句和疑问句，一般不用于肯定句中（在
肯定句中常被must, have to, ought to, should 等情态动词取代）。作为情态动词，它的词形
只有need 一种形式。
You needn't return the book now. You can keep it till next week if you like.
你现在不必
还书， 如果愿意，你可以下周还。（needn't = don't have to）
Need I hand in my homework now
我现在就要交家庭作业吗？
--- Need he finish the article next week
他要下个星期完成这篇文章吗？
--- Yes, he must.
是的，他必须完成。
--- No, he needn't.
不，他不需要。（= he doesn't have to）
2．行为动词need
need 和dare 一样，也可以作行为动词，可用于肯定句、否定句和疑问句中。行为动词
need 有人称和数的变化。
5
Plant needs water.
植物需要水。
My shirt needs a button.
我的衬衫需要一枚钮扣。
My car needs repairing.
我的车该修理了。
He has grown up. We don't need to worry about him.
他已经长大了，我们不必为他担心。
You don't need to buy so many things for the picnic.
你不必为这次野餐买这么多东西。
Patience is needed for that job.
干那工作，需要耐心。
提示：
Need 作为情态动态时，不要用于肯定句中。
【误】She need do her homework by herself. (need 作为情态动词时，不用于肯定句中)
【正】She needs to do her homework by herself.
她该独立完成家庭作业。
第四章 情态动词（二）
一、 情态动词+动词完成式
“情态动词+have done ”是情态动词的一个十分重要的结构，这种结构有两个主要的用
法。
表示对过去发生的动作或状态的推测或估计
may might have done
表示“大概已经”
通常用于肯定句和否定句。
might 有时可用于疑问句。
can could have done
表示“可能已经”
通常用于疑问句和否定句。
could 有时可用于肯定句。
must have done
表示“一定已经”
只用于肯定句，具有较大的可能性
should have done 表示“该”,可能性较小
表示对过去发生的动作的遗憾或责备
might have done
表示“本可以
通常用于肯定句
could have done
表示“本可以
通常用于肯定句。
should have done
表示“应该
可用于肯定句、否定句和疑问句。
ought to have done
表示“应该”
同should have done。
needn't have done
表示“本没有必要”
5
只用于否定句。
A ．may /might /have done
1 ．表示对过去事实不大肯定的推测，常译为“可能已经”。
They might have taken a later train. 也许他们乘坐的是晚一点儿的火车。
He seems to know the city quite well. He may have been there before. 他似乎对那个城市很
熟悉，他以前可能去过那儿。
2 ．表示“本来应该或可以做但没有做某事”，含有轻微的责备口吻或遗憾。
You might have given him more help, though you were busy. 你本来应该给他更多的帮助，
虽然你很忙。
The proposal might have been refused. 这个建议本该拒绝的。
B．cancould have done
1 ．表示对过去事实的推测，常用于否定句和疑问句。
He can't couldn't have watched TV yesterday for he knew they would have an exam.
昨天
他不可能看电视，因为他知道快要考试了。
I don't know why she didn't call me yesterday. Can (Could) she have forgotten my
telephone number 我不知道昨天她为什么没给我打电话，难道她会把我的电话号码忘了吗？
He didn't come to school yesterday. Can he have been ill
他昨天没来学校，难道他生病
了？
2 ．could 可表示对过去能做而未做的事感到惋惜、遗憾，可译成“本来是可以……的”。
Why didn't Sophie apply for the job She could have got it.
为什么索菲不申请这项工作？
她本来是能得到的。
Why did you stay at a hotel when you went to New York You could have stayed with
Barbara. 你到纽约时为什么住宾馆？你完全可以和芭芭拉住在一起的。
Given more time, we could have done the work better. 如果给我们更多的时间，我们完全可
以把这项工作干得更好。
C ．must have done
1 ．表示对过去事实有把握的推测，具有较大的可能性。只用于肯定句中，否定句和疑问
句用cancould have done。
His watch must have stopped. 他的表肯定停了。
--- I rang your flat yesterday. A man answered but I didn't recognize the voice. 昨天我给你
家打电话，一位男士接了电话，但我没听出来是谁的声音。
--- Oh, it must have been my brother Peter. 哦，那一定是我哥哥彼得。
2 ．用于虚拟语气中时，表示与过去事实相反。
You must have caught the bus if you had got up earlier. 如果你早一点儿起床的话，你准
能赶上那一班公共汽车了。（事实上没有赶上公共汽车）
He must have won the game if he had been careful enough.
如果他足够细心的话，他准能
赢得比赛。.
D ．needn't have done
用于对过去的责备，表示“没有必要做某事，可是做了”。
The airport is close to us. You needn't have hurried there early. 机场离这儿很近，你没必要
早早地赶到那里。（可是你早早地到那儿了）
He is still young. You needn't have sent him such an expensive present. 他还小，你没必要送
他这么昂贵的礼物。
5
注意：
如表示“过去不必做也没有做”之意，需用didn't need to do。
It is not cold today. I didn't need to take the thick sweaters out. 今天天气不冷，我没有必要
把厚毛衣拿出来。（实际上也没拿）
E ．shouldought to have done
1 ．表示对过去动作的责备或批评。
You should have gone over your lessons. (In fact you didn't go over your lessons.) 你们应把
功课复习好的。（可事实上你们没有。）
You shouldn't have watched TV last night. (In fact you watched TV last night.) 你们昨天晚
上本不该看电视。（可你们看了。）
You oughtn't to have entered the teachers' office without permission. 没有经过允许，你们
本不该进老师的办公室。
You oughtn't to have gone to the deserted place alone. 你不该独自去那荒凉之地。
2 ．表示期待或推测。
If the flight was on time, you should ought to have arrived in Shanghai early this
morning.如果航班准点的话，你今早就能到上海了。
The building should ought to have been completed by the end of the week. 这幢建筑物本
周末前应该能完工。
F．would have done
表示与过去事实相反的假设或结果。
I would have been happy to see him, but I didn't have time. 我会很高兴和他见面的，但我
没时间见他。
If your father had still been alive, he would have felt very proud of you. 你父亲如果还健在
的话，他会为你骄傲的。
动词不定式
5
第五章 动词不定式（一）
动词不定式是动词的一种非谓语形式，在句中不能单独作谓语。动词不定式具有动词的
性质，它可以有自己的宾语和状语，从而构成动词不定式短语。它还可以有形式的变化，
即一般式、进行式、完成式和被动式。同时，动词不定式也具有非动词的性质，相当于一
个名词、形容词或副词，可以在句中担任主语、宾语、宾语补足语、表语、定语和状语。
一、动词不定式的特征和种类
动词不定式是由不定式符号to+动词原形构成，在某些情况下to 也可省略。
A ．不定式的一般式
不定式的一般式表示的动作通常与主要谓语的动作同时或几乎同时发生，或是在它之后
发生。
He appears to be very happy. 他看起来好像很高兴。（同时发生）
To catch the train, we'd better hurry to the station by taxi. 为了赶上火车，我们最好赶紧乘
出租车去车站。（to catch the train 发生在hurry to the station 之后）
B．不定式的进行式
不定式的进行式表示正在进行的或与谓语动词同时发生的动作。
It happened to be raining when I got there. 我到达那里的时候，天碰巧在下雨。
I'm glad to be traveling with you. 我很高兴和你一起旅游。
C．不定式的完成式
不定式的完成式表示的动作在谓语表示的动作之前发生。
I'm sorry to have lost your key. 我很抱歉把你的钥匙弄丢了。
I meant to have finished my work last night, but I didn't feel very well.
我本来想昨晚完成
工作的，但是我感觉身体不舒服。
It has been an honor for me to have been invited to your country. 对我来说，被邀请来你们
国家是一件很荣幸的事情。
D．不定式的完成进行式
不定式的完成进行式表示的动作在谓语之前发生并且一直进行着。
He was said to have been living in London for twenty years. 据说他在伦敦一直住了20 年。
I'm sorry to have been interrupting you. 很抱歉，我一直打扰你。
5
比较：
不定式的时态意义。
He is said to be studying abroad. 据说他正在国外读书。（不定式的进行式表示动作正在进
行）
He is said to have studied abroad. 据说他在国外学习过。
（不定式的完成式表示动作已经结
束）
E．不定式的被动形式
当不定式逻辑上的主语是这个不定式表示的动作的承受者时，不定式一般要用被动形式。
不定式的被动形式根据其与谓语动作发生的先后关系，有一般式和完成时两种。
1 ．一般式to be done
These are the books to be given out to the students. 这些是要发给学生的书。
He asked to be sent to the place where he was most needed.
他要求被派往最需要他的地
方。
2 ．完成式to have been done
The novel is said to have been translated into many languages.
据说这部小说已被译成多
种语言。
He appeared to have been questioned for many times. 看起来他已经被询问过很多次了。
F. 不定式的否定形式
不定式的否定形式由not 或never 加不定式构成。
We decided not to go out because of the bad weather. 由于天气不好，我们决定不出去。
Never to have made any mistake is impossible. 从不犯错是不可能的。
注意：谓语动词的否定和不定式的否定不同的意义
I did not promise to wake him up. 我没有答应叫醒他。
I promised not to wake him up. 我答应了不叫醒他。
一、动词不定式的用法
动词不定式除了不能单独作谓语外，几乎能担任句子中所有的句子成分。
A ．动词不定式作主语
不定式具有名词的特征，可在句子中充当主语。
1 ．不定式短语在句首作主语
To know oneself is difficult. 人贵有自知之明。
To say is one thing and to do is another. 说是一回事，做又是另一回事。
To love and to be loved is the greatest happiness one can get.
爱与被爱是一个人能获得的
最大幸福。
2 ．用it 作形式主语
在很多情况下，人们通常用it 作为形式上的主语，而把不定式移到谓语之后，使句子结
构显得平稳一些。
It's rude to turn your back to your teacher and refuse to answer. 背对着老师，拒绝回答问
题是不礼貌的。
It is impossible to learn a foreign language without making painstaking effort.
想不下苦功
就能学会外语是不可能的。
It seemed a pity to have wasted so much time. 浪费了这么多时间，真是遗憾。
注意：
当主语和表语都是不定式时，不能用形式主语代替动词不定式。
To respect others is to be respected. 尊重别人就是尊重自己。
To become a slave is to give up one's freedom.做奴隶就等于放弃自由。
5
B ．动词不定式作表语
不定式作表语可以说明主语的具体内容或表示目的。
His wish is to become an astronaut. 他的愿望是成为一名宇航员。
What he hoped was to be admitted into the university. 他希望能被大学录取。
To live is to do something worthwhile. 活着就是要做一些有价值的事情。
注意：
有些作表语的不定式，在结构上是主动的，但在意义上却是被动的。
She is to blame. 她应该受到责备。
The house is to let. 此房出租。
The result is not long to see. 结果不久就会看到。
C ．动词不定式作宾语
不定式可以充当部分及物动词的宾语，也可以充当but 和except 等介词的宾语以及形容
词的宾语。
1 ．作动词的宾语
①不定式可以充当部分及物动词的宾语。
Father likes to listen to music in silence. 父亲喜欢静静地听音乐。
He prefers to be starved to death rather than beg. 他宁愿饿死也不愿乞讨。
I never thought to meet you here. 我没想到在这里遇见你。
必背：
可接不定式作宾语的动词有：
afford 负担得起
agree 同意
aim 以……为目标
ask 要求
attempt 尝试
begin 开始
care 喜爱
choose 决定
continue 继续
decide 决定
desire 要求
determine 决心
expect 期待
fail 不能
forget 忘记
hate 不愿
hope 希望
ntend 打算
manage 设法
mean 打算
offer 表示愿意
plan 计划
prefer 宁愿
pretend 假装
promise 答应
refuse 拒绝
remember 记起
try 努力
want 想要
wish 希望
5
②在feel, find, make, think, consider 等动词后，如果宾语带有宾语补足语时，人们常常用
it 作形式宾语，而把真实宾语放在宾语补足语之后。
I found it possible to work out the problem without a computer.
我发现有可能不用计算机
而解出这道题目。
She made it a rule to get up at five. 她养成了五点起床的习惯。
I feel it a great honor to be invited to speak at the meeting before so many students. 我觉得
被邀请在会上面对这么多学生发言是一件很光荣的事情。
③在表示“希望、打算”等动词（如hope, expect, intend, mean, want 等）的过去式后，
可接动词不定式的完成式来表示没有实现的动作。
I intended to have called on you, but was prevented from doing so. 我原想来拜访你的，但
没来成。
I expected to have met him here last night. 我以为昨天晚上能在这里见到他。（但没做到）
We meant to have stayed there a week. 我们原打算在那儿呆一个星期的。
I wanted to have dropped her a line, but forgot to do so. 我原想写一封信给她，但忘记了。
提示：
表示“原打算、原以为”还可以用这类动词的过去完成时来表达。
I had intended to call on you. 我原想来拜访你的。
I had expected to meet him here last night. 我原以为昨天晚上能在这里见到他的。
We had meant to stay there a week. 我们原打算在那儿呆一个星期的。
2 ．作介词的宾语
不定式可以作介词but 和except 的宾语。
The teacher made no comments except to tell him to work hard.
老师除了叫他努力学习
外，未做任何评价。
He had no choice but to sit there as usual. 他没有什么选择，只好像往常一样坐在那儿。
There is nothing we can do but wait patiently. 我们只能耐心等待。
3 ．作形容词的宾语
不定式作形容词的宾语有两种句型，一个是句子的主语是不定式的逻辑主语，另一个是
句子的主语是不定式的逻辑宾语。
①句子的主语是不定式的逻辑主语。这类形容词有able, afraid, angry, anxious, careful,
clever, content, cruel, determined, disappointed, eager, foolish, fortunate, frightened, happy,
impatient, glad, lucky, naughty, prepared, proud, ready, slow, shocked, sorry, surprised,
willing 等。
I am sorry to say that he is going from bad to worse. 很遗憾，他的情况每况愈下
She was not content to live a quiet life in a small town.
她不满足在一个小镇里过默默无闻
的生活。
John was happy to be given the job. 约翰得到这份工作很高兴。
②句子的主语是不定式的逻辑宾语。这类形容词有easy, hard, cheap, expensive,
dangerous, difficult, funny, fit, impossible, interesting, nice, pleasant, simple, strange, useful
等。
This problem is easy to solve. 这个问题很容易解决。
The water is not fit to drink. 这水不适于饮用。
She is hard to get along with. 她这个人很难相处。
注意：在这种结构中，如果不定式是不及物动词，则必须加上结构或含义所需的介词。
The river is dangerous to swim in. 在这条河里游泳很危险。
A spring mattress is comfortable to sleep on.席梦思床垫睡上去很舒服。
D ．动词不定式作宾语补足语
不定式可以在“主语+谓语+宾语+宾语补足语”句型中充当宾语补足语。在这一句型中，
5
宾语是动词不定式的逻辑主语。
1 ．在表示感觉的动词后作宾语补足语，并且不定式都不带to。这类动词有：see, hear, feel,
watch, notice, observe, look at, listen to 等。
I heard them sing yesterday. 昨天我听见他们唱歌了。
Did you see him go out 你看见他出去了吗？
I felt something crawl up my leg. 我感到有什么东西爬到我腿上了。
注意：转为被动语态时，原不带to 的不定式要变成带to 的不定式。notice 和watch 没有
被动语态。
We saw the car stop.
The car was seen to stop.我们看见这辆车停了下来。
2 ．在使役动词后作宾语补足语，不定式不带to。
这类动词有：make, let, have 等。转为被动语态时，其后通常都用带to 的不定式（have
没有被动语态）。
有些动词跟不定式作宾语补足语时省去了to，这些动词有：
一感二听三让四观看。
一感：feel 二听：hear,listen to 三让：let,have,make 四观看：observe,see,watch.,look
at
What would you have me do 你要我做什么？
She made him give up smoking. 她让他戒了烟。
Let him do whatever he wishes to do. 他想干什么就让他干吧。
Though he had often made his little sister cry, today he was made to cry by his little sister.
虽然经常是他弄哭小妹妹，但今天他却被小妹妹弄哭了。
3 ．在表示心理状态的动词后作宾语补足语。这类动词有：consider, think, believe, discover,
find, imagine, judge, suppose, prove
等。这类动词后的不定式通常是“to be+ 形容词或名
词”结构，think, consider, find 后的to be 常可省略。
We consider him (to be) a good teacher. 我们认为他是一个好老师。
He proved that theory (to be) very important. 他证明那个理论是很重要的。
I thought her (to be) nice and honest the first time I met her.
我第一次见到她的时候就认
为她人很好，很诚实。
4 ．在表示情感状态的动词后作宾语补足语。这类动词有：love, like, prefer, hate, want, wish,
expect 等。
I'd prefer you to leave him alone. 我希望你不要打扰他。
I don't want there to be any trouble. 我不想有任何麻烦。
5 ．动词advise, allow, ask, beg, command, tell, invite, force, oblige, get, help, encourage,
persuade, permit, remind, request, order, warn, cause 等后面，多接不定式短语作宾语补足
语。
We don't allow such things to happen again. 我们不容许这种事情再发生。
Most of the parents agree to forbid their children to smoke.大多数父母都同意禁止自己
的孩子抽烟。
She asked me to answer the phone in her absence. 她请我在她不在的时候接电话。
Please remind me to leave her this note. 请提醒我留给她这张纸条。
She requested him to go with her. 她邀请他一同去。
注意：hope, demand, suggest 等动词后面不能接不定式作宾语补足语。
【误】I hope you to give me a hand.
【正】I hope you can give me a hand.我希望你能帮我一把。
【正】I wish you to give me a hand.我希望你能帮我一把。
5
【误】He demanded me to be present at the meeting.
【正】He demanded that we should be present at the meeting.他要求我们出席会议。
【正】He required us to be present at the meeting.他要求我们出席会议。
【误】Mr Li suggested her not to go there alone.
【正】Mr Li suggested that she should not go there alone.李先生建议她不要独自去那里。
6 ．动词不定式也可作一些短语动词的宾语补足语。
I'm waiting for James to arrive. 我正等着詹姆斯的到来。
He's arranged for a car to pick them up at the station. 他已安排了一辆汽车去车站接他们。
The UN has called on both sides to observe the ceasefire.
联合国号召交战双方遵守停火协
定。
必背：
这些带介词的短语动词有：
call on 号召
arrange for 安排
ong for 盼望
wait for 等待
depend on 依靠
rely on 指望
E．动词不定式作定语
不定式作定语通常放在其修饰的名词或代词之后，和被修饰的名词或代词之间是主谓关
系、动宾关系、同位关系和修饰关系。
1 ．主谓关系
The future to greet us will be bright. 我们的未来会十分美好的。
He is always the first person to come and the last one to leave.
他总是第一个来最后一
个离开。
The next train to arrive was from New York. 下一列到站的火车是从纽约开来的。
2 ．动宾关系
On Sundays, he always has a lot of letters to write. 星期天，他总是有许多信要写
The teacher left us a lot of problems to solve. 老师给我们留了许多道题要解答。
He can find no one to make friends with. 他找不到可交朋友的人。
注意：由于动词不定式与其修饰的词之间往往有动宾关系，因此，如果该不定式是不及
物动词，其后应有必要的介词。
She has a child to take care of. 她有一个孩子要照看。
There is nothing to worry about. 没什么可担心的。
He has no friend to depend on. 他没有可依靠的朋友。
I've got a lot of things to see to this morning. 今天上午我有许多事情要处理。
3 ．同位关系
He broke his promise to write to his parents regularly.
他没有遵守诺言定期给他父母亲写
信。
We students should have the courage to face any difficulty.
我们学生应该有勇气面对任何
困难。
I have no wish to quarrel with you. 我不想和你吵架。
4 ．修饰关系
Now it is time to begin our class. 现在是上课的时间了。
I need somewhere to take a nap. 我需要一个地方打个盹。
Is that the way to open the can 那就是打开罐头的方法吗？
5
F ．动词不定式作状语
不定式作状语可以表示行为的目的、结果、原因、条件等。
1 ．表示目的
I'm saving up to buy a computer. 我在存钱买电脑。
To save the child, he laid down his life. 为了救那个孩子，他献出了生命。
注意：有时为了强调或突出这种目的，也可以用in order (not) to do, 和so as (not) to do
结构（so as to do 不可以置于句首）。
He shouted and waved in order to be noticed. 为了吸引注意，他又嚷嚷又挥手。
I'll write down his telephone number so as not to forget it. 我要把他的电话号码记下来，以
防忘记。
2 ．表示结果
He got to the station only to find the train had gone. 他赶到车站，发现火车已经开走了。
What have I said to make you so angry 我说了什么话使你气成这样？
After the meeting, they parted, never to see each other again. 散会后，他们分手了，从此再
也没有见面。
必背：不定式表示结果常见于下列句型。
1 ）so ... as to do
Would you be so kind as to lend me your bicycle 把你的自行车借给我好吗？
2 ）such ... as to do
We are not such fools as to believe him. 我们还没蠢到竟会相信他。
3 ）enough to do
He didn't run fast enough to catch the train. 他跑得不够快,没赶上火车。
4 ）only to do
He lifted a rock only to drop it on his own feet. 他搬起石头砸自己的脚。
5 ）too ... to do
His eyesight is too poor to read such small letters. 她的视力太差了，不能看这么小的字。
注意：too...to...结构中的形容词如果是eager, pleased, happy, ready 等，动词不定式不表
示结果，也没有否定的意思。
The boy was too eager to get a geography book.
那个男孩非常急切地想要得到一本地理
书。
He is too anxious to know the examination results. 他很急切地想知道考试结果。
3 ．表示原因
I was a fool not to listen to you at that time. 我当时不听你的话，真是傻瓜。
She wept to find him in such a difficult situation. 看到他处于这么困难的情形，她哭了。
4 ．表示条件
A man would be blind not to see that. 一个人如果看不到这点，那他就是瞎子。
How can you catch the train to start so late 这么晚才动身，你怎么能赶上火车？
第五章 动词不定式（二）
一、动词不定式的几种常见结构
A．不定式的复合结构
动词不定式的逻辑主语（即不定式动作的执行者）通常是句子的主语或宾语。如果不定
式的逻辑主语不是句子的主语，此时一般用“for +名词（代词）+不定式”来构成不定式的
复合结构，这种复合结构在句中可以做主语、宾语、表语、状语、定语。
This box is too heavy for the little boy to carry. 这个箱子让这个小男孩来搬太重了。
That's for you to decide. 那个由你来决定。
6
He stood aside for me to pass. 他站到一边让我通过。
I have some books for you to read. 我有几本书送给你读
。
B．be +不定式结构
“be +不定式”结构可以表示将来发生的动作，常有以下两种情况：
1 ．表示命令和指示
The room is to be locked. 这房间要上锁。
You are not to stand here. 你不能站在这里。
2 ．表示计划或安排
We are to begin the work next month. 我们安排下一个月开始这项工作。
What's to be done next 下一步该怎么办？
C ．疑问词+不定式结构
疑问词who, what, which, when, where, how, why 后加动词不定式构成不定式短语，它在
句中可作主语、宾语和表语。
I don't know whether to go to the meeting or not. 我不知道要不要去开会。
The problem was how to get rid of the waste thrown by the passengers. 问题是如何处理乘
客们丢弃的垃圾。
When to visit the Palace Museum has not been decided yet.
何时参观故宫博物院还没有决
定。
D ．withwithout +名词+不定式结构
“withwithout +名词+不定式”结构在句子中通常起状语的作用。
With so much work to do, I shall not be able to go to the cinema with you. 有这么多工作要
做，我不能和你去看电影了。
With him to stay in the house, I feel quite safe. 有他住在家里，我感到十分安全。
Without anything to eat, he died of hunger. 由于没有东西吃，他饿死了。
E ．It is +形容词+ forof sb + to do 结构
在“It is +形容词+ of sb +不定式”结构中，形容词往往表示人物的性格和特征，如kind,
silly, good, unwise, clever, wrong, right, foolish, stupid, careless, rude, impolite, bold,
thoughtful, honest, bad, sensible, naughty 等。在“It is +形容词+for sb +不定式”结构中，
形容词通常表示事物的性质，如important, possible, impossible, necessary, difficult, hard,
reasonable 等。
It's kind of you to think so much of us. 难为你这么为我们着想。(= You are kind to think
so much of us.)
How careless it is of him to break such a valuable vase! 他真不小心，把如此贵重的花瓶打
破了。
It is easy for me to see through his trick.
我很容易看穿他的鬼把戏。(=For me to see
through his trick is easy.)
It is hard for him to get rid of his bad habits. 他很难改掉自己的坏习惯。
比较：
It is good lf you to help me with my English.
你真好，帮助我学英语。（强调you 的特征
＝You are good to help me.）
It is good for you to give up smoking.
戒烟对你有好处。（强调的是give up smoking 这
一行为＝Fof you to give up smoking is good.）
F ．分裂不定式
动词不定式to do 通常是不拆开的，但偶尔也可在不定式符号to 和动词原形之间插入一
个副词，构成分裂不定式。
6
He was too ill to completely carry out that program. 他病得太重，不能完成那个项目。
He has made up his mind to once more try this method.
他已经下定决心再试试这个方
法。
G ．用作独立成分的不定式
有一些不定式短语可以作状语修饰整个句子，也可被称为插入语。
To be honest, we are not sure to find the girl in the forest. 说老实话，我们不能确保在森林
里能找到那个女孩。
To be frank, I don't agree with what you said. 坦率地说，我不同意你说的话。
必背：用作独立成分的不定式
to tell you the truth 说老实话
to be frank 坦率地说
to begin with 首先
to be brief 简言之
to make a long story short 长话短说
to be exact 精确地说
to say nothing of 姑且不说
to conclude 总而言之
to be sure 诚然，固然
to do him justice 说句对他公道的话
so to speak 可以这么说
H ．用主动式表示被动含义的不定式
动词不定式在句中究竟用主动还是被动，有时比较复杂，主要有下面几种情况：
1 ．不定式做后置定语，和被修饰的名词或代词构成逻辑上的动宾关系，但又和该句主语
构成逻辑上的主谓关系时。
Do you have anything to say on this question 针对这个问题你有什么要说的吗？
He is a pleasant person to work with. 他是一个与其合作起来令人感到愉快的人。
2 ．不定式作形容词的宾语，和句子主语构成逻辑上的动宾关系时。
The book is difficult to understand. 这本书很难理解。
The chair is comfortable to sit on. 这把椅子坐起来很舒服。
3 ．There be 结构中，当说话人考虑必须有人去完成某件事时。
There is nothing to worry about. 没什么可担心的。
There is nothing to fear. 没有什么可害怕的。
比较：
There is a lot of work to do. 有许多事情要做。（表示某人必须做这工作）
There is a lot of work to be done. 有许多事情要做。（强调有许多事情必须做）
She has two letters to type. 她有两封信要打。（自己打）
She has two letters to be typed. 她有两封信要打。（别人打）
I ．表示虚拟语气的不定式完成式。
I hoped to have met him at the railway station, but he didn't turn up. 我本希望在火车站接
到他，但他未露面。
We would love to have gone to the match, but the tickets were all sold out. 我们原想去看这
场比赛的，但票已售完了。
The plane was to have taken off at 9, but something went wrong. 飞机原计划九点起飞，但
出现了一些故障。
J ．用于感叹句。
6
不定式可用于感叹句，含有惊异、不满、惋惜或赞美等感情色彩。
To think that he should do this! 想想，他竟然干出这等事！（表示惊讶）
Oh, God, to see her dance ! 哦，天哪，看看她的舞蹈！（表示赞美）
To think that all the money has been wasted. 想想，所有的钱都被浪费掉了！（表示不满）
一、关于不定式符号的几个问题
A ．不带to 的不定式
1 ．在口语中，动词原形come 和go 后可接不带to 的不定式。
Go tell her. 去告诉她吧。
Come have a glass. 来喝一杯。
2 ．在why 引起的一些问句中，疑问词直接跟动词原形或not+动词原形。
Why make so much noise 为什么发出这么大的噪音？
Why not join us 为什么不加入我们？
3 ．在had better, had best, would rather, would rather...than, would sooner, would
sooner...than, cannot but, cannot choose but, cannot help but等结构后直接跟动词原形或not
+动词原形。
You'd better listen to your teacher's opinion. 你最好听一听老师的意见。
We had best call for the doctor at once. 我们最好马上就请医生来。
She can't do anything but ask silly questions. 她一直在问一些愚蠢的问题。
Rather than ride on a crowded bus, he always prefers to ride a bicycle.
他宁愿骑自行车，
也不愿挤公共汽车。
He cannot but move to another street, because his building has to be pulled down soon.
他
不得不搬到另一条街上去，因为他住的大楼很快就要被推倒。
We cannot help but admire his courage. 我们情不自禁地钦佩他的勇气。
4 ．如不定式前有行为动词do，那么在表语从句中的不定式和介词except 或but 之后的
不定式可不带to。
The only thing I could do was go home. 我能做的唯一一件事就是回家。
They could do nothing but wait for the doctor to come. 他们只能等待医生的到来。
5 ．在两个动词不定式并列使用时，为了避免重复，后面的不定式符号to 可省略。
The little girl hardly knew whether to laugh or cry. 这小姑娘不知道是哭好还是笑好。
Can you help me to call him and ask him to attend the meeting at 200 p.m.
你能不能帮我
打电话给他，叫他下午两点来开会？
6 ．在help 之后，既可用带to 的不定式也可用不带to 的不定式。
Can I help (to) carry the box for you 我帮你搬箱子，好吗？
7 ．在一些固定搭配中用不带to 的不定式。
He let go the rope. 他松开了绳子。
I hear say there will be an earthquake soon. 我听说不久就要有一次地震。
She made believe she was innocent. 她假装清白。
8 ．在感官动词see, hear, watch, feel, notice 以及使役动词make, let, have 等后作宾语补足
语的动词不定式不带to。
She watched the children cross the street. 她看着孩子们穿过了马路。
They made the boy apologize to his friend for being so rude.
他们让那男孩因他的粗鲁而
向他的朋友道歉。
Don't forget to have him come earlier. 别忘了让他早点儿来。
6
B ．不定式符号的单独使用
为了避免重复上文中出现过的动词，可以用不定式符号to 来代替上文中出现过的不定式
结构。
1 ．在助动词或情态动词之后，如be going to, used to, have to, ought to, be able to, be about
to 等。
She must go but you don't have to. 她必须走，但你没有必要。
---Do you think I ought to go to see my doctor 你认为我应该去看医生吗？
---Yes, I think you ought to. 是的，我想你应该去。
2 ．在want, decide, like, love, hope, wish, mean, refuse, try等动词之后。
You may go with them if you hope to. 如果你希望的话，你可以和他们一起去。
---Did you go to see the Great Wall 你游览长城了吗？
---I wanted to, but I was too busy. 我本来想去的，但我太忙了。
3 ．在做宾语补足语的ask, tell, order, advise, persuade, warn, wish, permit, allow, forbid
等动词之后。
Don't do anything unless your father tells you to. 除非你父亲叫你去做，不然不要做任何
事情。
---May I use your car 我可以用你的汽车吗？
---No, I forbid you to. 不，我禁止你使用。
4 ．在对话的答语中的happy, glad, eager, anxious, willing, ready, pleased, afraid 等形容词
之后。
---Will you lend me a hand 你能帮我一个忙吗？
---I'm willing to, but I can't now. 我很愿意，但现在不行。
---Would you please come to my birthday party tomorrow
明天下午来参加我的生日聚会
好吗？
---I'll be glad to. 我很乐意。
提示：
如果动词不定式是to be 或to have，则一般不省。
--- Did you finish the work 你的工作完成了吗？
--- No, but I hoped to have. 没有，但我希望已经完成了。
C ．介词to 和不定式符号to
to 既可以是不定式符号，后接动词原形；to 也可以是介词，后接名词或动词的-ing 形式。
英语中有很多常用短语带有to，我们要正确判断to 是不定式符号还是介词，千万不可混淆。
1 ．不定式符号to
He made it a rule to read English aloud for half an hour every morning.
他坚持每天早晨
朗读半小时英语。
These young lads are longing to go to watch the football match.
这几个小伙子极想去看足
球赛。
必背：常见的带不定式符号to 的短语
be supposed to do 应该做某事
be determined to do 决心要做某事
fail to do 未能做某事
go all out to do 全力以赴做某事
have the nerve to do 有胆量做某事
have a great mind to do 很想做某事
make a point to do 坚持做某事
make up one's mind to do 决定做某事
take the trouble to do 不辞辛苦地做某事
prepare oneself to do 有思想准备做某事
6
2 ．介词to
If you stick to the truth, you will have nothing to fear. 如果你坚持真理，就没有什么可害怕
的。
You must get used to getting up early. 你必须习惯早起。
Isn't it time you got down to marking those papers
难道还没到你定下心来阅卷的时间
吗？
必背：常见的带介词to 的短语
be used to 习惯
be equal to 胜任
be given to 沉溺于
be opposed to 反对
be related to 与……有关
devote oneself to 献身于
get down to 着手做
give rise to 引起
lead to 导致
look forward to 盼望
object to 反对
pay attention to 注意
put one's mind to 全神贯注于
stick to 坚持
6
第6 章 动词的-ing 形式
动词的-ing 形式包括传统语法的“动名词”（gerund）和“现在分词”（present
participle）两个部分。动词的-ing 形式具有动词的特征，同时又具有名词、形容词和副词
的特征，因此它可以在句中作主语、表语、定语、宾语、宾语补足语和状语。
一、动词-ing 形式的特征和种类
与动词不定式一样，动词的-ing 形式也具有动词的特征，有时态和语态的变化，并可带
状语、宾语等。
A.动词-ing 形式的一般式
1. 动词-ing 形式的一般式可用来泛指一个动作，没有特别的时间意义。
Swimming is her favorite sport. 游泳是她最喜欢的体育运动。
Learning is important to modern life. 学习对现代生活很重要。
2. 动词-ing 形式的一般式可用来表示和谓语动词同时发生的动作。
They went out of the classroom, talking and laughing. 他们有说有笑地走出教室。
She listened carefully to her neighbours speaking. 她倾听她邻居的讲话。
3. 动词-ing 形式的一般式有时也可表示在谓语动词的动作之前或之后发生的动作。
I remembered sending him an e-mail
last week.
我记得上星期给他发过一份电子邮
件。
He suggested taking my daughter to the zoo the next Sunday.
他建议下个星期天带我女儿
去动物园。
B.动词-ing 形式的完成式
动词的-ing 形式的完成式表示一个已完成的动作，这个动作发生或完成在谓语动词表示
的动作之前。
Having lived in this city for three years, she knows it very well. 在这个城市生活了3 年，她
对这里已很熟悉。
I really regretted having missed such an exciting lecture.
错过了这么振奋人心的演讲，我
真的很遗憾。
注意：
在现代英语中，作宾语的-ing 形式的完成式可用一般式来代替。
I really regretted missing such an exciting lecture.
错过了这么振奋人心的演讲，我真的很
遗憾。(=I really regretted having missed such an exciting lecture.)
6
We remembered seeing the film.
我们记得看过这部电影。(=We remembered having seen
the film. )
C.动词-ing 形式的被动形式
动词的-ing 形式的被动形式表示它的逻辑主语是-ing 形式表示的动作的承受者。
1 ．一般式的被动形式
The question being discussed is very important. 正在讨论的问题很重要。
I can't stand being kept waiting. 我不堪久候。
2 ．完成式的被动形式
I heard of his having been chosen to be the coach of the team.
我听说他被选为球队的教
练。
Having been shown the lab, we were taken to see the school library.
在被带去看了实验室
之后，我们又被带去参观校图书馆。
D. 动词-ing 形式的否定形式
动词的-ing 形式的否定形式是由not 加动词的-ing 形式构成。
His not coming made everyone present very disappointed.
他没来使在场的每个人
都很失望。
I'm sorry for not being present at the meeting in time. 我很抱歉没能按时赴会。
Not knowing his address, I could do nothing but stay at home and wait. 不知道他的地址，
我只好在家里等着。
Not having studied his lessons very hard, he failed the examinations.
因为没有努
力学习功课，他考试不及格。
二、动词的-ing 形式的用法
A．动词的-ing 形式作主语
1 ．动词的-ing 形式可直接置于句首作主语。
Seeing is believing. 百闻不如一见。
Collecting stamps is interesting. 集邮很有趣。
Learning about a language is easier than using it. 学习有关语言的知识比使用语言容易。
Being invited to the party was a great honor to the family.
被邀请参加晚会是这家人的荣
耀。
2 ．为了保持句子平衡，通常用先行词it 作形式主语，而把真正的主语放在句末。
It is easy making plans, but it is difficult carrying them. 制定计划很容易，实行它却很难。
It is no use crying over spilt milk. 作无益的后悔是没有用的。
It's a waste of time arguing about it. 争论这事是浪费时间。
必背：动词的-ing 形式作主语的几个常用句型。
It's no good talking to him. 和他谈话是没有用的。
It is useless telephoning him. He is not willing to come. 给他打电话没用。他不愿意来。
It's worth making an effort. 努力一下是值得的。
There is no saying when it will stop raining. 无法断定这场雨什么时候会停。
There is no joking about such matters. 这种事开不得玩笑。
B ．动词的-ing 形式作表语
动词的-ing 形式作表语的有两种不同的含义：
1 ．表示主语的内容是什么。
Her job is keeping the lecture hall as clean as possible.
她的工作是尽量使报告厅保持干
净。
The real question is getting to know the needs of the students.
真正的问题是了解学生的需
要。
His hobby is collecting stamps. 他的爱好是集邮。
6
2 ．表示主语具有的特征。
The problem is quite puzzling. 这个问题很令人困惑。
It was astonishing to see the animals and plants that are found nowhere else in the world.
看到了世界上其它地方找不到的动植物真是令人惊讶。
The food at the dinner party did not seem very inviting.
宴会上的食物似乎并不诱人。
比较：
一般说来，动词的-ing 形式表示一般性、习惯性的动作，或抽象性的动作，时间概念不
强。而动词不定式表示的动作往往是具体的或一次性的动作，特别是将来的动作。
Smoking is forbidden here. 这里禁止吸烟。（泛指）
It's not good for you to smoke so much. 吸这么多烟对你的身体不好。（具体）
They prefer staying indoors when the weather is cold. 天冷时他们喜欢呆在室内。（泛指）
Would you prefer to stay at home this evening 今晚你想待在家里吗？（具体
C．动词的-ing 形式作宾语
动词的-ing 形式既可作及物动词的宾语，也可作介词的宾语。
1 ．作动词的宾语
能用-ing 形式作宾语的及物动词可分两类，一类是只能用-ing 形式作宾语，另一类是既可
用-ing 形式作宾语，也可用不定式作宾语。
①只能用-ing 形式作宾语的动词
这类动词只能用-ing 形式作宾语，不能用不定式作宾语。
Fancy meeting you here! 想不到在这儿见到你了!
I suggest doing it in a different way. 我建议用另一种方法做这件事。
They didn't mind being treated like guests. 他们不在乎被人当作宾客对待。
They admitted smokinghaving smoked in the hall. 他们承认在大厅里抽过烟。
I regret sayinghaving said what I said. 我很后悔自己说过的话。
He couldn't help laughing. 他情不自禁地笑了起来。
I can't imagine the boy speaking so rudely to you.
我不能想像这个男孩对你说话这么没
礼貌。
必背：
只接动词的-ing 形式而不接不定式作宾语的动词有
admit 承认
appreciate 感激
avoid 避免
consider 考虑
delay 耽搁
dislike 嫌恶
enjoy 喜欢
escape 避免
excuse 原谅
fancy 想不到
feel like 意欲
finish 完成
forgive 原谅
give up 放弃
cannot help 情不自禁
imagine 设想
include 包括
keep 保持
mention 提及
mind 介意
6
miss 逃过
put off 推迟
practice 练习
resist 抵制
risk 冒险
②既可用动词-ing 形式作宾语，也可用不定式作宾语
这类动词虽然既能用-ing 形式作宾语，也能用不定式作宾语，但用法并不相同，主要有
以下几种情况：
a. 有些动词，如attempt, continue, hate, intend, like, love, prefer 等，后面接动词的-ing 形
式或不定式区别不是很大。
They prefer spending
to spend their summer vacation in Dalian. 他们更喜欢在大连度暑
假。
I intend to buy buying an English-Chinese dictionary.我想买一本英汉词典。
提示：应尽量避免接连出现两个动词-ing 形式。
I am starting to learn Russian. 我开始学俄语。
避免说：I am starting learning Russian. 我开始学俄语。
b. need, require, want 作“需要”解时，后面接-ing 形式的主动形式或不定式的被动形式，
意义上并无差别，但用-ing 形式比较普通。
Your composition needs correcting to be corrected.你的作文需要修改。
His coat wants cleaning to be cleaned. 他的大衣需要洗了。
The old woman requires looking after carefully
to be looked after carefully. 这个老大娘
需要细心地照料。
2 ．作介词宾语
动词的-ing 形式作介词宾语大都和一些固定搭配有关。常见的几种搭配形式有：
①动词+介词+ -ing 形式
Jason aims at becoming an astronaut. 詹森立志要当宇航员。
I dream of being the best footballer in the school. 我梦想成为全校最好的足球队员。
比较：
keep doing 继续或保持做某事。（强调动作的持续性）
News lf successes keeps pouring in. 捷报频传。
Keep on doing 继续或反复做某事。（强调动作的反复性）
We will keep on trying and.if we get anything done.will notify you.
我们将继续努力。有结果将通知你。
Keep sb doing 使某人一直做某事（表示被迫进行的动作）
I'll try not to keep you waiting. 我尽量不让你久等。
Keep sb from doing 阻止某人做某事（＝preventstop sb from doing）
The stone walls keep the farmer's cows from joining his neighbor's cows.
石头墙使农民家的牛不会混入邻居的牛群中去。
②动词+名词+介词+ -ing 形式
Please excuse me for being late. 对不起，我迟到了。
What prevented you from joining us last night 昨天晚上什么事使你不能和我们在一起
Sandy wasted no time in getting to know the boss's daughter.
桑迪很快就开始就和老板的
女儿套近乎了。
③名词+介词+ -ing 形式
We like his way of teaching English. 我们喜欢他教英语的方式。
He has little hope of passing the examination. 他几乎没有什么希望通过考试。
I have no difficulty in communicating with foreigners.
我在和外国人交谈方面没有什么困
难。
④形容词+介词+ -ing 形式
I'm tired of having the same food every day. 天天吃同样的东西我感到腻烦了。
Peter is angry about not being invited to the party. 没有被邀请出席聚会，彼得很生气。
6
Who's responsible for organizing this conference 是谁负责组织这次大会？
⑤whathow about + -ing 形式
What about going for a walk 去散步好不好？
How about playing a game of chess now 现在来下盘棋好吗
⑥介词to +动词-ing 形式
to
既可以是介词，也可以是不定式符号，在使用中比较容易混淆。若是不定式符号，to
后接动词原形；若是介词，to 后需接-ing 形式。
You must get used to washing your face with cold water. 你必须习惯用冷水洗脸。
John has admitted to breaking the window. 约翰已承认了打碎窗子。
I'm looking forward to seeing you this summer vacation. 我盼望今年暑假见到你。
He has devoted his whole life to benefiting mankind.
他为全人类的利益献出了自己的一
生。
However, others strongly object to developing private cars. 然而,另有一些人强烈反对发展
私人小汽车。
He is equal to doing this task. 他能胜任这项任务。
The man took to drinking shortly after his wife died. 他妻子死后不久，这人就开始嗜酒。
Isn't it time you got down to marking those papers 难道还没到你安下心来阅卷的时D．动
词的-ing 形式作宾语补足语
1 ．动词的-ing 形式可以在see, hear, notice, watch, feel, smell, look at, listen to, observe,
find 等表示感官和心理状态的动词后面作宾语补足语，和一个名词或代词一起构成复合宾
语。
We heard the children shouting upstairs. 我们听见孩子们在楼上叫喊。
I noticed a man running out of the bank when I got off the car.
我下车的时候注意到一个
男人从银行里跑出来。
I felt my heart beating violently. 我觉得我的心在猛烈地跳动。
2 ．动词的-ing 形式和不定式作宾语补语的区别
在see, hear, feel, watch, notice 等感官动词后，既可用动词的-ing 形式构成复合宾语，也
可用不定式构成复合宾语，两者之间有一定的区别。用动词的-ing 形式时，表示动作正在
进行；用不定式时，表示动作发生了，即动作的全过程结束了。
He saw a girl getting on the car. 他看见一个女孩在上汽车。(She was getting on the car.)
He saw a girl get on the car and drive off.
他看见一个女孩上车开走了。(She got on the
car and drove off.)
Do you hear someone knocking at the door
你听见有人在敲门吗？(Someone is knocking
at the door.)
Do you hear someone knock at the door
你听见有人敲门了吗？(Someone knocked at the
door just now.)
提示：
如果宾语补足语是一系列的动作，通常只能用不定式来表示，不用动词的-ing 形式。
I saw him enter the room, sit down and light a cigarette. 我看见他走进房间，坐了下来，点
燃了一根香烟。
3 ．动词的-ing 形式也可用在have, get, leave, keep, set, catch 等表示“致使”的动词后作
宾语补足语。
They should not leave us wondering what they will do next. 他们不应该不让我们知道他们
下一步要做什么。
I won't have you running about in the room. 我不允许你在房间里跑来跑去。
We kept the fire burning all night long. 我们使火整夜燃烧着
E．动词的-ing 形式作定语
1 ．单个的动词的-ing 形式可以作前置定语，一般有两种含义。
①说明被修饰名词的用途和性能。
a reading room= a room which is used for reading 阅览室
7
running shoes= shoes for running 跑鞋
a working method = a method of working 工作方法
必背：
a sewing machine 缝纫机
a swimming pool 游泳池
a drawing board 画板
a dining car 餐车
a driving permit 驾驶许可证
a walking stick 手杖
a singing competition 歌咏比赛
a waiting room 候车室
②表示所修饰的人或物的动作或状态，在意思上接近一个定语从句，可以表示正在进行
的动作，也可表示经常性动作或当时的状态。
developing countries = countries that are developing 发展中国家
an ordinary-looking house = a house that looks ordinary 看起来很普通的房子
a puzzling problem = a problem that puzzles somebody 困扰人的问题
The working people are masters of our country. 劳动人民是我们国家的主人。
Let sleeping dogs lie. 不要惹麻烦。
必背：
a disappointing play 令人失望的戏剧
an astonishing adventure 惊人的冒险
boiling water
正在沸腾的水
a sleeping baby
熟睡的婴儿
a barking dog
狂吠的狗
the setting sun 落日
the coming week
下一周
failing sight 逐渐衰退的视力
2．作定语的-ing 形式如是一个短语，则应放在被修饰词的后面。
The bottle containing vinegar should be sent to the laboratory.
装着醋的那个瓶子应送到
实验室去。
They lived in a house facing south. 他们住在一所朝南的房子里。
The book being discussed a lot will be published next month.
人们谈论很多的那本书下一
个月将出版。
3 ．有些情况下，动词的-ing 形式不能用来作定语，必须使用定语从句。
①作定语的-ing 形式表示的动作要与主句谓语的动作同时发生，如两者不能同时发生的
话，则需使用定语从句。
【误】The professor coming here yesterday will give us a lecture.
【正】The professor who came here yesterday will give us a lecture. 昨天来的教授将要给
我们作一个讲座。
②-ing 形式的完成式一般只用来作状语，不作定语。
【误】The temple having been destroyed by the earthquake will be rebuilt soon.
【正】The temple which has been destroyed by the earthquake will be rebuilt soon.被地震
毁坏的庙宇很快就要修建了。
间吗？F．动词的-ing 形式作状语
动词的-ing 形式可以作状语，修饰动词，在句中表示时间、原因、结果、条件、让步、行
为方式或伴随情况等。-ing 形式作时间、原因、条件、让步状语时多位于句首；作结果、
伴随情况状语时常位于句末。
1 ．表示时间，相当于一个时间状语从句。
Seeing those pictures, she remembered her childhood. 看到那些画，她想起了自己的童年。
（= When she saw those pictures...）
Having made full preparations, we are ready for the examination.
我们已经作好了充分准
7
备，现在可以应考了。（= After we have made full preparation...）
2 ．表示原因，相当于一个原因状语从句。
Not knowing his address, I can't send this book to him. 因为不知道他的地址，我不能把这
本书送给他。（= As I don't know his address...）
Being ill, he didn't go to school yesterday.
由于生病，他昨天没有上学。（= Since he was
ill...）
3 ．表示结果，相当于一个并列谓语。
His father died, leaving him a lot of money.
他父亲死了，留给他许多钱。（= ... and left
him a lot of money）
She was so angry that she threw the toy on the ground, breaking it into pieces.
她非常生
气，把玩具扔在地上，摔成了碎片。（= ... and broke it into pieces...）
4 ．表示条件，相当于一个条件状语从句。
Going straight down the road, you will find the department store. 顺着这条路一直走，你就
会发现那家百货商店。（= If you go straight down the road...）
Working hard at your lessons, you will succeed. 如果你努力学习，就一定能成功。（= If you
work hard at your lessons...）
5．表示让步，相当于一个让步状语从句。
Knowing all this, they made me pay for the damage.
尽管知道了一切情况，他们还是要我
赔偿损失。（= Although they knew all this...）
Working hard as he did, he was still unable to earn enough money to buy a car.
他虽然努
力地干，但仍然挣不够买车的钱。（= Though he worked hard as he did...）
6 ．表示行为方式、伴随情况或补充说明，相当于一个并列结构。
He lay on the grass, staring at the sky for a long time. 他躺在草地上，长时间地望着天空。
（= ...and stared at the sky for a long time）
She came into the house, carrying a lot of books.
她捧着许多书走进了房间。（= ...and
carried a lot of books）
三、动词的-ing 形式的逻辑主语
A．作主语的-ing 形式
-ing 形式作主语时，其逻辑主语对于谈话双方是不言而喻的。
Reading aloud is very helpful. 朗读是很有好处的。（Reading aloud 的逻辑主语是泛指任何
人，因而无需表达出来）
提示：
如果作主语的-ing 形式需要自己的逻辑主语时，一般用物主代词或名词所有格（即名词
后加's）。
His father's falling ill worried him greatly. 他父亲生病使他很着急。
（his father 是falling ill
的逻辑主语）
Your coming to work with us will be a great encouragement to us. 你来和我们一道工作，对
我们是很大的鼓舞。（you 是coming to work with us 的逻辑主语）
B．作表语的-ing 形式
-ing 形式作表语时，其逻辑主语往往是句子中的主语，但作表语的-ing 形式也可带有自己
的逻辑主语。
What worries me most is Julia's staying too late every night.
我担心的是她天天晚上熬夜
熬得太迟。（staying too late every night 的逻辑主语是Julia）
The main problem is your not having practiced a lot.
主要的问题是你缺乏大量的练习。
（not having practiced a lot 的逻辑主语是you）
C．作定语的-ing 形式
-ing 形式作定语时，其逻辑主语就是它修饰的名词。
7
an interesting book 一本有意思的书= a book that interests its readers
a running stream 一条奔流的小溪= a stream that is running
如果-ing 形式的逻辑主语是动作的承受者，就要用-ing 形式的被动式。
The meeting being held in Beijing now is of great importance. 正在北京召开的会议非常重
要。（逻辑主语the meeting 和“举行”之间的关系是被动的，所以用being held
D．作宾语的-ing 形式
-ing 形式作宾语时，其逻辑主语常是句子中的主语。如要明确动作的执行者，也可以在-ing
形式前加上名词或代词表示逻辑主语。
I can't imagine John's giving a speech in front of so many people.
我不能想像约翰会在这
么多人前面发言。(John 是giving a speech 的逻辑主语)
He was awakened by someone knocking at the door.
他被某人的敲门声吵醒了。
(someone 是knocking at the door 的逻辑主语)
The boss understood himhis wanting to leave.
老板明白他为什么要离职。（“他”是
wanting to leave 逻辑主语）
比较：
He insisted on doing it himself.
他坚持要自己做。（doing it 的逻辑主语是句子的主语
“他”）
He insisted on my doing it. 他坚持要我做。（doing it 的逻辑主语是“我”）
Would you mind opening the window 请你把窗子打开好吗？（opening the window 的逻辑
主语是“你”）
Would you mind my opening the window
你介意我把窗子打开吗？（opening the window
的逻辑主语是“我”）
E．作宾语补足语的-ing 形式
动词-ing 形式作逻辑主语时，它的逻辑主语就是它前面的宾语。
We often hear her singing this song.
我们经常听见她唱这首歌。（singing this song 的逻辑
主语是“她”）
We often hear this song (being) sung.
我们经常听见这首歌被人唱。（逻辑主语“this
song”和宾语补足语“唱”的关系是被动，所以用-ing 形式的被动式或-ed 分词。）
F ．作状语的动词-ing 形式
1 ．动词的-ing 形式作状语时，其逻辑主语一般应与句子的主语保持一致。
Entering the classroom, I found nobody in it. 走进教室，我发现里面没人。（entering 的逻
辑主语是I，相当于when I entered the classroom, I found nobody in it.）
如-ing 形式表示的动作不是句中主语发出或承受的，那就是误用。这种无依着的-ing 形式，
语法上称之为“垂悬分词”。
【误】Looking out through the window, the garden was beautiful.（looking out through the
window 的逻辑主语是the garden，显然不对）
【正】Looking out through the window, we saw a beautiful garden.从窗户看出去，我们看
见一个漂亮的花园。
【误】Reading the evening newspaper, a dog started barking. （逻辑主语是dog，它不会
看晚报）
【正】I was reading the evening newspaper when a dog started barking. 我看着晚报的时
候，一只狗开始叫起来。
2 ．如不能和句子中的主语保持一致，该-ing 形式必须有自己的逻辑主语，通常有名词或
代词来担任。
The last bus having gone, we had to walk home.
末班车已经开走了，我们不得不走回家。
（having gone 的逻辑主语是the last bus，而不是we）
Time permitting, the football match will be played on Friday.
天气允许的话，足球赛将在
7
周五举行。（permitting 的逻辑主语是time，而不是the football match）
注意：
高中阶段有一些固定的-ing形式短语，如generally speaking, judging from..., considering...,
talking of..., supposing...等，它们的逻辑主语可以和句子的主语不一致。这种-ing 短语可当
作一个插入语。
Generally speaking, boys are more interested in science than girls.
一般说来，男孩
比女孩对科学更感兴趣。
Judging from his accent, he must come from Canada. 从他的口音看，他一定来自加拿大。
Considering how poor he was, we decided to let him attend the concert for free.
考虑到他
是多么的穷，我们决定让他免费听音乐会。
Supposing it rains what will you do 假使下雨，你会怎么办呢？
过去分词
第7 章 动词的过去分词形式
动词的-ed 形式也是非谓语动词的一种，它具有动词的一些特点，同时也具有形容词、副
词的句法功能，在句中可用作表语、定语、状语和宾语补足语等。
一、动词的-ed 形式的特征
A．动词的-ed 形式是由动词的过去分词构成
动词的-ed 形式只有一种形式，即传统语法中的过去分词。绝大部分的动词的-ed 形式由
动词原形加-ed 构成，也有一些动词的-ed 形式是不规则的。
1． 规则动词的-ed 形式
limit→limited（限制）
pretend→pretended（假装）
escape→escaped（逃脱）
provide→provided（提供）
refer→referred（提交）
drag→dragged（拖）
pray→prayed（祈祷）
supply→supplied（供应）
2．不规则动词的-ed 形式
cast→cast（投掷）
spread→spread（传播）
bite→bitten（咬）
forgive→forgiven（原谅）
spit→spat（ 吐）
wear→worn（穿）
fight→fought（搏斗）
lose→lost（丢失）
3．少数动词的-ed 形式作定语时，读音与一般过去分词不同
learned a learned professor 一位知识渊博的教授
aged an aged man 老人
beloved his beloved computer 他心爱的计算机
B．动词的-ed 形式的否定形式
动词的-ed 形式的否定形式是由not 或never 加动词的-ed 形式构成。
Not allowed to go in, he had to wait outside. 不允许他进去，他只好在外面等着。
Never invited to his party, she got angry with him. 从未被邀请过去他的聚会，
7
她很生气。
C．动词的-ed 形式的特征
动词的-ed 形式有被动的意思，有时也可表示完成的动作。
1．动词的-ed 形式表示已完成的动作。
除了作形容词用的-ed 形式外，动词的-ed 形式可带有完成的意义，有的同时也带有被动
的意义。
Born and brought up in the countryside, he was interested in biology. 由于在
农村出生并长大，他对生物很感兴趣。
One of the glasses was found broken. 有人发现其中一个杯子破了。
The books, written by Lu Xun, are popular with many Chinese people. 鲁迅写的
这些书，受到了许多中国人的喜爱。
2．及物动词的-ed 形式一般表示被动的意思。
Given more time, I could have solved that riddle. 要是有充足的时间，我就能猜
出那个谜语。（句子的主语I 和动词give 之间是被动关系。）
When you speak English, be sure to make yourself understood. 你说英语的时候，
一定要让人懂得你的意思。（动词make 的宾语yourself 和宾语补足语understand 之间是
被动关系。）
The experience gained in the army was of great value to our study. 在军队获得
的经验对我们的学习很有帮助。
3．不及物动词的-ed 形式只表示完成的意思，并不带有被动的含义。
an escaped prisoner 逃犯 （= a prisoner who has escaped）
a retired worker 退休工人 （= a worker who has retired）
a newly arrived guest 新来的客人 （= a guest who has just arrived）
We should bring in advanced technology from developed countries from time to time.
我们应该不时地从发达国家引进先进技术。
People should pay attention to the changed situation. 人们应该注意到变化了的
形势。
二、动词的-ed 形式的用法
动词的-ed 形式在句中主要起形容词和副词的作用，可以作定语、表语、状语和补语。
A．动词的-ed 形式作表语
1．-ed 形式在连系动词后作表语，说明主语的状态。
The students are fully prepared. 学生们已做好了充分的准备。
When we got there, the shop was closed. 我们到那儿时，商店已经关门了。
She felt satisfied with her performance on the high-and-low bars. 她对自己在
高低杠上的表现感到很满意。
The land remained unexploited. 这片土地尚未开发。
Hearing the news, he looked disappointed. 听到这个消息，他看起来非常失望。
The top of the mountain is covered with snow all through the year. 山顶上终年
积雪覆盖。
比较：
要把-ed 形式作表语和被动语态区别开来。作表语的-ed 形式表示状态，被动语态中的-ed
形式表示被动动作。
All the doors are locked. 所有的门都是锁着的。（-ed 形式作表语，表示状态）
All the doors were locked by the guard. 所有的门都被卫兵锁上了。（被动语态，表
示动作）
Peter the Great is buried here. 彼得大帝就埋葬在这里。（-ed 形式作表语，表示状
态
Peter the Great was buried here in 1725. 彼得大帝于1725 年被埋葬在这里。（被动
语态，表示动作）
2．同一动词的-ed 形式与-ing 形式作表语时的区别。
动词的-ed 形式作表语，主要表示主语的心理感觉或所处的状态，含有被动的意思，而-ing
7
形式作 表语多表示主语具有的特征，含有主动的意思。
They were frightened to hear the frightening sound. 他们听到那可怕的声音很害
怕。
At the sight of the moving scene, all the people present were moved. 看到这么
动人的情景，所有在场的人都感动了。
提示：
上述动词的-ed 形式，有的（如pleased, tired, excited, disappointed等）已经变成
形容词，可以被very, too 等副词修饰。有的（如amused, puzzled, relaxed等）还不能
被very, too 修饰，只能被much 修饰。
These problems are very puzzling. 这些问题很令人迷惑。
We are much puzzled by his failure to reply. 他不给我们回信使我们百思不得其
解。
His speech was very moving. 他的演讲非常感人。
All the people present were moved to tears. 在场的所有人都被感动得流泪了。
B．动词的-ed 形式作宾语补足语
当作宾语补足语的动词和前面的宾语之间是被动关系时，一般应用动词的-ed 形式作宾语
的补足语。
1．在感觉动词see, hear, feel, notice, watch, find 后作宾语补足语。
I heard the Ninth Symphony played last night. 昨晚我听了第九交响乐的演奏。
We found all the rivers seriously polluted. 我们发现所有的河流都被严重污
染了。
Yesterday I noticed a little girl caught stealing in the shop. 昨天我在商店里
注意到一个小女孩偷东西被抓住了。
He felt his collar pulled by someone from behind. 他感觉到衣领被人从后面拉了
一下。
2．在使役动词get, have, make, leave, keep 等后作宾语补足语。
①动词的-ed 形式作get 的宾语补足语。
Doris got her bad tooth pulled out in the hospital. 多丽丝在医院把坏牙拔了。
I'll just get these dishes washed and then I'll come. 我得先把盘子洗了，然后
就来。
比较：
动词get 后也可接动词不定式或动词的-ing 形式作宾语补足语，和宾语是主动关系。
I couldn 誸 get the car to start this morning. 今早我无法把汽车发动起来。
He got his sister to help him with his clothes. 他让姐姐帮他洗衣服。
It is not hard to get him talking; the problem is stopping him! 让他说话不难，
难的是说开了止不住他。
Can you really get that old clock going again 你真的能让那辆旧钟再走起来吗？
②动词的-ed 形式作make 的宾语补足语。
He raised his voice in order to make himself heard. 他提高了嗓门为了使别人听
清他的讲话。
You should make your views known to the public. 你应该让公众知道你的观点。
注意：
动词make 后的宾语补足语可用不带to 的动词不定式或动词的-ed 形式，但不可用动词的
-ing 形式。
【误】Can you make the students understanding the text
【正】Can you make the students understand the text 你能让学生理解这篇课文吗？
【正】Can you make the text understood by the students 你能让学生理解这篇课文
吗？
③动词的-ed 形式作keep 或leave 的宾语补足语。
They all went home, leaving all the work undone. 所有的工作都没完成，他们就回
家了。
7
The detective and his assistant kept themselves locked in the room all night.
侦探和他的助手把自己整夜反锁在房间里。
3．动词的-ed 形式也可用在with（without）结构中，作介词的宾语补足语。
With everything well arranged, he left the office. 一切都安排妥善之后，他离开
了办公室。
She has come back with her backpack filled with interesting picture-books. 她
已经回来了，背包里塞满了有趣的图书。
Without any grain left in the house, the little girl had to go begging. 家里
没有粮食，小女孩只好出去讨饭。
Without any more time given, we couldn't finish the task in three weeks. 如果
不再给我们任何时间的话，我们三星期之内完成不了任务。
4．某些动词后（如want, need, prefer, would like等），作宾语补足语的不定式被动
形式省略“to be”，就成了-ed 形式作宾语补足语。
I would like this matter (to be) settled immediately. 我希望这事立即得到解决。
I'd prefer this book translated by my sister. 我情愿让我妹妹来翻译这本书。
We need the work (to be) finished by Saturday. 我们需要这项工作周六之前完成。
The peasants don't want good farmland (to be) built on. 农民们不想让好好的农
田被用来建造房子。
C．动词的-ed 形式作定语
动词的-ed 形式作定语修饰名词分为前置和后置两类。
1．前置定语
单个的动词的-ed 形式作定语一般放在被修饰的名词之前，作前置定语。
A watched pot never boils. 心急锅不开。
All the broken doors and windows have been repaired. 所有的坏门窗都修好了。
When we arrived, we each were given a printed question paper. 我们到达的时候，
每人被发给了一份印制好的试卷。
提示：
如要表示强调，单个动词-ed 形式也可作后置定语。
Money spent is more than money earned. 入不敷出。
2．后置定语
作后置定语的-ed 形式一般都带有修饰语或其他成分，在语法上相当于一个定语从句。
We have read many novels written by this author. 我们读过这个作家写的许多小说。
（= that are written by this author）
Half of the honoured guests invited to the reception were foreign ambassadors.
被邀请到招待会上的贵宾有一半都是外国大使。
（= who had been invited to the reception
）
The meeting, attended by one thousand students, was a success. 这次会议获得很
大的成功，共有一千名学生出席了。(= which was attended by one thousand students)
A woman, dressed like a lawyer, came in and took her seat as judge. 一个律师
装扮的女人走了进来，并作为法官就座。(= who was dressed like a lawyer)
3．动词的-ed 形式作定语和-ing 形式作定语的区别
动词的-ed 形式作定语表示动作已完成或和被动，而-ing 形式作定语表示动作正在进行
或和主动。
the risen sun 升起了的太阳
the rising sun 正在升起的太阳
boiled water 开水
boiling water 正沸腾的水
developed countries 发达国家
developing countries 发展中国家
fallen leaves 落叶
falling leaves 正在飘落的叶子
changed condition 改变了的情况
7
changing condition 变化着的情况
动词的-ed 形式作状语和-ing 形式作状语一样，也可以表示时间、原因、条件、让步、 方
式或伴随情况等。
1．表示时间
动词的-ed 形式作状语表示时间，相当于一个时间状语从句。
Seen from the tower, the city looks beautiful. 从塔上往下看，城市显得很美丽。
（= When the city is seen from the tower...）
Shown the lab, we were taken to see the library. 带我们参观了实验室之后，又带
我们参观了图书馆。（= After we had been shown the lab...）
Completely examined by the doctors, he went back to school right away. 经过医
生彻底检查以后，他立刻回到了学校。(= After he was completely examined...)
提示：
有时动词的-ed 形式前可加连词when 或while 来强调时间概念。
When asked why she was late for class again, she hung her head in shame. 当被
问到为什么上课又迟到时，她羞愧地低下了头。
Once recovered, he went all out to do his work. 一恢复健康，他就全力以赴地干
起了工作。
Once started, the clock will go half a month and keep good time.一旦给这钟上
了发条，它就会走半个月，并且走得很准。
2. 表示原因
动词的-ed 形式作状语表示原因，相当于一个原因状语从句。
Moved by the heroic deeds, the children couldn't help crying. 孩子们被英雄事
迹感动，情不自禁地哭了起来。（= Since they were moved by the heroic deeds ...）
Written in haste, her letter is very hard to read. 因为写得快，她的信很难阅读。
（=As it was written in haste ...）
Excited by the new discovery, we decided to go out and celebrate. 我们因为新
发现而激动万分，决定出去庆祝一下。(Because we were excited by...)
注意：
为了使-ed 形式表示的条件、动词让步意义更加明显，我们可以加上适当的连词。
Even if invited,I won'tgo. 即使受到邀请，我也不去。
Though beaten by the opposite team,they did not lose heart. 虽然被对手打败，
便他们并没有丧失信心。
Unless invited,he will not come back to the company. 除非被邀请，不然他不会
回到公司来的。
3. 表示条件
动词的-ed 形式作状语表示条件，相当于一个条件状语从句。
Heated, water changes into steam.
加热，水就能变成蒸汽。（= If water is heated...）
Given more time, he would be able to do better. 假如多给一些时间，他会干得更
出色。（= If he was given more time ...）
Compared with other professors, she was an excellent speaker. 与其他教授相比，
她是一个优秀的演说家。
4. 表示让步
动词的-ed 形式作状语表示让步，相当于一个thoughalthough 引导的让步状语从句。
Exhausted by the running, they went on running after the robber. 尽管已经跑得
筋疲力尽，他们还是继续追赶着那个强盗。（= Although they were exhausted by the
running ...）
Laughed at by many people, he continued his research. 尽管被许多人嘲笑，他还
是继续他的研究。（= Even if he was laughed by many people ...）
Questioned many times a day, Andrew kept silent over the murder. 尽管一天被盘
问了多次，安德鲁仍然对那件谋杀案保持沉默。
提示：
7
有时动词的-ed 形式作状语和动词的-ing 形式的被动式作状语，并没有多大的区别，可
以互换。
Suddenly seized with a high fever, he was unable to attend school. 他因突然发
热不能来上学。
= Being suddenly seized with a high fever, he was unable to attend school. 他
因突然发热不能来上学。
Brought up in the countryside, he found it hard to get used to town life. 因
为是在农村长大的，他感到很难适应城市生活。
= Having been brought up in the countryside, he found it hard to get used to town
life. 因为是在农村长大的，他感到很难适应城市生活。
5．表示行为方式、伴随情况或补充说明。
动词的-ed 形式作状语表示行为方式、伴随情况或补充说明时，通常位于句子的后面，相
当于一个并列分句。
The teacher stood there, surrounded by the students. 老师站在那儿，被学生围住
了。（= and he was surrounded by the students）
He went into the office, followed by some children. 他走进办公室，后面跟着一
些孩子。(= and he was followed by some children)
They turned around and stood in the middle of the room, completely astonished.
他们转过身来，站在房间中央，完全惊呆了。
She accepted the gift, deeply moved. 她接受了礼物，深深地感动了。
注意：
动词的-ed 形式在句中不能用作主语或宾语。
【误】Invited to the state banquet is a great honour.
【正】To be invited to the state banquet is a great honour. 被邀请出席国宴是
极大的荣耀。
【误】I cannot stand laughed at.
【正】I cannot stand being laughed at. 我不能容忍被人嘲笑。
三、动词的-ed 形式的逻辑主语
A．动词的-ed 形式在句中作状语和表语时，它的逻辑主语一般来说就是句子的主语，-ed
形式和主语之间是被动关系。
Locked up, he had no way to escape. 他被锁了起来，没有办法逃跑了。
Lost in thought, he almost ran into the car in front of him. 他陷入了沉思，几
乎撞到了前面的汽车。
She became discouraged at the news. 听到这个消息，她泄气了。
Though it was 1000 a.m., the door of the shop remained locked. 尽管已经是上午
10 点了，商店的门仍然锁着。
B．当动词的-ed 形式在句中作定语时，它的逻辑主语是被它修饰的名词，它和名词之间
是被动关系。
The first textbooks written for teaching English as a foreign language came out
in the 16th century. 第一批编写出来作为英语教材的课本是16 世纪出版的。
The computer center, opened last year, is very popular among the students in this
school. 去年开办的计算机中心深受这所学校的学生喜爱。
A lighted candle lit up the cellar. 一支点燃的蜡烛照亮了地下室。
C．当动词的-ed 形式在句中作宾语补语或主语补语时，它的逻辑主语是句子的主语或宾
语，它们之间的关系是被动关系。
Vivien got her fingers trapped in the bicycle chain. 薇薇恩把手指卡在自行车链
条里了。（trapped 的逻辑主语是句子的宾语fingers）
The valuable vase was found stolen. 那个珍贵的花瓶发现被盗了。（stolen 的逻辑主
语是句子的主语vase）
We got home only to find the whole house turned upside down. Thieves obviously
had broken in. 我们回到家发现整幢房子被翻得乱七八糟, 很明显小偷闯进来了。
7
D．动词的-ed 形式有时可有其独立的逻辑主语，常用作状语（详见“第8 章 独立主格结
构”）。
Everything done, we went home. 一切事情都做完了，我们就回家了。
All our money run out, Henry had to find another job. 钱都用完了，亨利不得不
再找一份工作。
He was lying on the grass, his hands crossed under his head. 他躺在草地上，头
枕着双手。
All things considered, the planned trip will have to be called off. 考虑到所
有的情况，原来计划好的旅行不得不取消。
E．动词的-ed 形式作独立成分。
动词的-ed 形式的一些固定词组也可在句中作独立成分，不受逻辑主语的限制。
Put frankly, I don't agree with what he said. 坦白地说，我不同意他所说的。
Given the general state of his health, it may take him a while to recover from
the operation. 考虑到他一般的身体状况，手术后的恢复可能需要一段时间。
第八章 独立主格结构
非谓语动词作状语时，它的逻辑主语应该是句子的主语。但有时非谓语动词带有自己的主
语，从而在结构上与主语不发生关系，我们称之为独立主格结构（Absolute Construction）。
其实，所谓“独立主格结构”也并非真正独立，它还是一种从属的结构。
一、 非谓语动词独立主格结构
在独立主格结构中，非谓语动词和它前面的名词或代词存在着逻辑上的主谓关系。
Such an able man to help you ，you will surely succeed sooner or later.
有这么能干的人来帮你,你迟早一定会成功的。（such an able man 和to help you 之间存在
着主谓关系）
= Since such an able man will help you, you will surely succeed sooner or later.
He seating himself at the desk, his mother began to tell him a story.
他在书桌旁坐好后，他母亲开始给他讲故事。（seating himself at the desk 拥有了自己的
逻辑主语he，注意是“主格”）
= When he seated himself at the desk, his mother began to tell him a story.
The key to the bike lost, he had to walk to school.
由于丢了自行车钥匙，他只好步行去学校。（lost 的逻辑主语是the key，lost 也可以用完
成式having been lost）
= Because the key to the bike had been lost, he had to walk to school.
A．
不定式“独立主格结构”
在“逻辑主语+动词不定式”结构中，动词不定式和它前面的名词或代词存在着逻辑上的
主谓关系。这种结构也可用一个从句或并列分句来表达。
1．动词不定式用主动的形式
在独立主格结构中，动词不定式和它前面的名词或代词存在着逻辑上的主谓关系。
His mother to come tonight ，he is busy preparing the dinner.
他母亲今晚要来,他正在忙着准备饭菜。（= As his mother is to come tonight, he is busy
preparing the dinner.）
——will you go to the comcert tonight 你今晚去听音乐会吗？
——sorry.So many exerise-books to check,I rially can't afford any time.
对不起，有这多的作业要批，我真的抽不出时间。
（＝Because I shall check so many exercise-books tonight,I really can't afford any time.）
The four of us agreed on a division of labour,each to translate a quarter of the book.
我们四人同意分工干，每人翻译全书的四分之一。
（＝The four of us agreed on a division of labour and each is to translate a quarter of the
book.）
Many trees,flowers,and grass to be planted,our newly-built school will look even more
beautiful. 种上许多的树，花和草后，我们新建的学校将看上去更美。(=If many
8
trees,flowers,and grass are planted,our newly-built school will look even more beautiful.)
B．-ing 形式“独立主格结构”
动词的-ing 形式作状语时，其逻辑主语一般应与句子的主语保持一致。
Being ill, he went home.
由于生病,他回家了。（= As he was very ill, he went home.）
Seating himself at the desk, he began to read a magazine.
在课桌旁坐好后，他开始看杂志。（= When he had seated himself at the desk, he began to
read a magazine.）
1．表示时间的-ing 形式作“独立主格结构”
Everyone being ready, the teacher began his class.
每个人都准备好后，老师开始上课。（相当于一个时间状语从句When everyone was
ready)
The chairman began the meeting , everyone being seated.
每个人坐好后，主席开始开会。（相当于一个时间状语从句after everyone was seated）
2．表示原因的-ing 形式作“独立主格结构”
The boy leading the way, we had no trouble finding the strange cave. 由那个男孩带路，我
们没有困难就找到了那奇怪的洞。（相当于一个原因状语从句Because the boy led the way）
Many eyes watching him, he felt a bit nervous. 许多眼睛看着他，他感到有点儿紧张。（相
当于一个原因状语从句As many eyes were watching him）
必背：
含有being 的独立主格结构。
It being National Day today ，the streets are very crowded.今天是国庆节,街上很拥挤。
= As it is National Day today, the streets are very crowded.
There being no further business to discuss, we all went home.
没有别的事可讨论，我们都
回家了。
= As there was no further business to discuss, we all went home.
3．表示条件的-ing 形式作“独立主格结构”
Time permitting, we will have a picnic next week.
时间允许的话，我们下星期将进行一次野炊。（相当于一个条件状语从句If time
permits)
My health allowing, I will work far into the night.
我的健康许可的话，我愿工作到深夜。（相当于一个条件状语从句If my health allows）
4．表示方式的-ing 形式作“独立主格结构”
The students are walking in the school happily, each wearing a card in front of his chest.
学生们快乐地在学校里走着，每个人胸前都带着一张卡。（相当于一个并列分句and each
wears a card in front of his chest）
The boy lay on the grass, his eyes looking at the sky.
男孩躺在草地上，眼睛看着天空。（相当于一个并列分句and his eyes were looking at the
sky）
C．-ed 形式“独立主格结构”
与逻辑主语+动词的-ing 形式一样，如果-ed 形式的逻辑主语和句子的主语不一致的话，
就需要用-ed 形式的独立主格结构。
The book written in simple English, English beginners were able to read it.
该书是用简单英语写的，英语初学者也能看懂。
= As the book was written in simple English ，English beginners were able to read it.
The workers worked still harder, their living conditions greatly improved.
由于工人们的生活条件大大提高，他们工作得更起劲了。
= As their living conditions were greatly improved, the workers worked still harder.
He was listening attentively in class, his eyes fixed on the blackboard.
他上课专心听讲，眼睛紧盯着黑板。
= He was listening attentively in class, and his eyes were fixed on the blackboard.
The task completed,he had two months' leave.
任务完成以后，他休了两个月的假。（=When the task had been completed,he had two
8
months' leave.）
比较：
动词不定式表示动作没有发生或即将发生，动词-ed 形式表示动作已经结束，动词-ing 形
式往往表示动作正在进行。
The manager looks worried ，many things to settle. 经理看上去很着急,有这么多的事情要
处理。（事情还没有处理，而且是由经理本人来处理，用不定式to settle）
The manager looks relaxed, many things settled. 许多事情已经处理好了，经理看上去很轻
松。（事情已经处理好了，用动词-ed 形式settled 表示动作已经结束）
The food being cooked, the boy was watching TV. 小孩一边做饭，一边看电视。（两个动作
同时进行）
The food cooked, the boy went to bed.
饭做好了，小孩去睡了。（两个动作有先后，饭
已做好，小孩才去睡觉的）
一、 动词独立主格结构
“逻辑主语+being+其他”是独立主格结构中的“逻辑主语+动词-ing 形式”的一种形式。
在这种结构中，being 往往可以被省去，这种省去being 的结构，称之为无动词“独立主格
结构”。
A．逻辑主语+名词
Ten students entered for the competition, the youngest a boy of 12.
十个学生报名参加了这次竞赛，年纪最小的是个12 岁的男孩。
（the youngest 和a boy of 12
之间省去了being）
注意：
独立主格结构中的being 在下列两种情况下一般不能省略，一是在“There being +名词”
结构中，二是在逻辑主语是代词的情况下。
There being no bus, we had to walk home. 由于没有公共汽车，我们只好走回家。
It being Sunday, all the offices are closed. 因为是星期日，所有办公室都关门。
B ．逻辑主语+形容词
He turned to me, his eyes sleepy.
他睡眼惺忪地转向我。（his eyes 和sleepy 之间省去了being）
= He turned to me, and his eyes were sleepy.
He stood there, his mouth wide open.
他站在那里，嘴张得大大的。（his mouth 和wide open 之间省去了being）
= He stood there, and his mouth was wide open.
C ．逻辑主语+副词
School over, we all went home.
放学了，我们都回家了。（school 和over 之间省去了being）
= School was over, and we all went home.
He sat at his desk, his shoes off.
他坐在课桌旁，没穿鞋子。（his shoes 和off 之间省去了being）
= He sat at his desk and his shoes were off.
D ．逻辑主语+介词短语
He is standing in front of the blackboard, his back towards us.
他站在黑板面前，背对着我们。
= He was standing in front of the blackboard, and his back was towards us.
The new teacher came in, a smile on her face.
新老师面带微笑走了进来。
= The new teacher came in and she had a smile on her face.
The teacher came into the classroom ，a rule in his hand.
老师走进教室，手里拿着一把直尺。
= The teacher came in and a ruler was in his hand.
提示：
在“逻辑主语+介词短语”构成的独立主格结构里，如果名词用单数，可以不用冠词，同
时介词短语里的限定词也可省略。
8
The music teacher stood at the door, violin in hand.
音乐老师站在门口,手里拿着一把小提琴。（= The music teacher stood at the door, a violin
in his hand.）
二、 withwithout 引导的独立主格结构
介词withwithout +宾语+宾语的补足语可以构成独立主格结构，上面讨论过的独立主格结构
的几种情况在此结构中都能体现。
A ．with+名词代词+形容词
He doesn 誸like to sleep with the windows open.
他不喜欢开着窗子睡觉。
= He doesn 誸like to sleep when the windows are open.
He stood in the rain, with his clothes wet.
他站在雨中，衣服湿透了。
= He stood in the rain, and his clothes were wet.
注意：
在“with+名词代词+形容词”构成的独立主格结构中，也可用已形容词化的-ing 形式或
-ed 形式。
With his son so disappointing ，the old man felt unhappy.
由于儿子如此令人失望,老人感到很不快乐。
With his father well-known, the boy didn 誸want to study.
父亲如此出名，儿子不想读书。
B．with+名词代词+副词
Our school looks even more beautiful with all the lights on.
所有的灯都打开时，我们的学校看上去更美。
= Our school looks even more beautiful ifwhen all the lights are on.
The boy was walking, with his father ahead.
父亲在前，小孩在后走着。
= The boy was walking and his father was ahead.
C．with+名词代词+介词短语
He stood at the door, with a computer in his hand. 或
He stood at the door, computer in hand.
他站在门口，手里拿着一部电脑。
= He stood at the door, and a computer was in his hand.
Vincent sat at the desk, with a pen in his mouth. 或
Vincent sat at the desk, pen in mouth.
文森特坐在课桌前，嘴里衔着一支笔。
= Vincent sat at the desk, and he had a pen in his mouth.
D ．with+名词代词+动词的-ed 形式
With his homework done, Peter went out to play.
作业做好了，彼得出去玩了。
= When his homework was done, Peter went out to play.
With the signal given, the train started.
信号发出了，火车开始起动了。
= After the signal was given, the train started.
I wouldn 誸dare go home without the job finished.
工作还没完成，我不敢回家。
= I wouldn 誸dare go home because the job was not finished.
E ．with+名词代词+动词的-ing 形式
The man felt very happy with so many children sitting around him.
有这么多的孩子坐在他周围，那男子感到很高兴。
= The man felt very happy when he found so many children sitting around him.
The girl hid her box without anyone knowing where it was.
小女孩把盒子藏了起来，没有人知道它在哪里。
= The girl hid her box and no one knew where it was.
8
Without anyone noticing, he slipped through the window. 他趁没人注意的时候，从窗口溜
走了。
= When no one was noticing, he slipped through the window.
F．with+名词代词+动词不定式
The little boy looks sad, with so much homework to do.
有这么多的家庭作业要做，小男孩看上去很不开心。
= The little boy looks sad because he has so much homework to do.
The kid feels excited with so many places of interest to visit.
有这么多的名胜可参观，小孩很激动。
The kid feels excited as there are so many places of interest to visit.
提示：
在withwithout 的复合结构中，多数情况下with 能省略，但without 不能省略。
Without a word more spoken, she left the meeting room.
她没再
四 、 独立主格结构的句法功能
独立主格结构在句中除了能充当原因状语、时间状语、条件状语和伴随状语外，还能作定
语。在形式上，“独立主格结构”可位于句首、句中或句尾，并通常用逗号与主句隔开。
A ．作状语
独立主格结构作状语，其功能相当于一个状语从句或并列分句。
1．表示时间
Night coming on, we put ourselves up in a small hotel. 夜幕降临，我们在一家小旅馆住了下
来。
（= When night came on, we put ourselves up in a small hotel.）
All the guests seated, they began their dinner.
所有的客人就坐后，他们才开始吃饭。
（= When all the guests were seated, they began their dinner.）
With everything she needed bought, Grace took a taxi home.
所需要的都买好后，格雷斯打的回家了。
（After everything she needed was bought, Grace took a taxi home.）
2．表示原因
With a lot of difficult problems to settle, the newly-elected president is having a hard time.
有许多难题要解决，新当选的总统日子不好过。
（= As he has a lot of difficult problems to settle, the newly-elected president is having a
hard time.）
There being no means of transportation, he had to walk home at midnight.
由于在半夜没有交通工具了，他只好步行回家。
(= As there was no means of transportation, he had to walk home at midnight.)
3．表示条件
Weather permitting, we will hold our yearly sports meeting next week.
如果天气允许的话，我们下星期将举行每年一次的运动会。
（= If weather permits，we will hold our yearly sports meeting next week.）
All the work done, you can have a rest.
所有工作做好后，你可以休息。
（=As long as all the work is done, you can have a rest.）
Everything taken into consideration, the plan seems to be more practical.
如果从各方面考
虑，你的计划似乎更实际些。
（= If everything is taken into consideration, the plan seems to be more practical.）
提示：
表示时间、原因、条件的独立主格结构一般放在句首，并且不能保留连词。
【误】When class being over, the students left their classroom.
【正】Class (being) over, the students left their classroom.下课了，学生都离开了教室。
【误】The moon appearing and they continued their way.
8
【正】The moon appearing, they continued their way.月亮出来了，他们继续赶路。
4．表示伴随情况或补充说明
The strange man was walking down the street, with a stick in his hand.
那个奇怪的男人在街上走着,手里拿着根手杖。
（= The strange man was walking down the street, and he carried a stick in his hand.）
The murderer was brought in, with his hands tied behind his back.
杀人犯被带了进来，手被捆在背后。
（=The murderer was brought in, and his hands were tied behind his back.）
Two hundred people died in the accident, many of them children.
有两百人在事故中丧生，其中许多是儿童。
（Two hundred people died in the accident and many of them were children.）
B．作定语
独立主格结构作定语，其功能相当于一个定语从句。
He is the person with a lot of questions to be settled. (with
的复合结构作定语,修饰the
student)
他就是有许多问题要解决的那个人。
= He is the person who has a lot of questions to be settled.
You can use a large plastic bottle with its top cut off. (with 的复合结构作定语,修饰bottle)
你可以使用一个颈被砍掉的大塑料瓶。
= You can use a large plastic bottle whose top was cut off.
He was walking along the road without any street lights on its both sides.
他走在一条两边没有路灯的马路上。(without 的复合结构作定语,修饰the road )
= He was walking along the road that didn 誸have any street lights on its both sides.
提示：
在这里我们讨论了很多用连词连接的两个句子改为独立主格结构的情况。需要提示的是，
不是所有用连词的地方都可以改为独立主格结构。
If you stand on the top of the mountain ，the park looks more beautiful.
如果你站在山顶上,公园看上去更美。（不要改为独立主格结构）
If you check your test paper carefully, some mistakes can be avoided.
如果你仔细检查试卷的话，有些错误是可以避免的。（不要改为独立主格结构）
说什么话就离开了会议室。（without 不能省略）
8
第九章 名词性从句
由一个主句和一个或一个以上的从句构成的句子叫复合句。名词性从句在复合句中起名词
的作用，它包括主语从句、宾语从句、表语从句、同位语从句四大类，在句中分别用作主
语、宾语、表语和同位语。
一 、引导名词性从句的关联词
A．that
连词that 本身没有意义，在从句中不担任任何句子成分，在宾语从句中有时可省略。
I hear (that) he has joined the football club. 我听说他已经加入了足球俱乐部。
That light travels in straight line is known to all. 众所周知，光是以直线传播
的。
It so happens that I know the man. 碰巧我认识那个。
Is it certain that they will win 他们一定会赢吗
B．whether 和if
连词whether 和if 本身有意义（解释是否），在从句中不可省略。
1．whether 可以连接所有的名词性从句，而if 只能引导宾语从句。
I didn't know whether he would attend the concert. 我并不知道他是否参加音乐会。
（宾语从句，可用if 代替whether）
The question is whether it s worth trying. 问题是值不值得试一试。（表语从句，
不可用if 代替whether）
Whether she comes or not makes no difference. 她来不来都没有关系。（主语从句，
不可用if 代替whether）
He must answer the question whether he agrees to it or not. 他必须回答他是否
同意此事这样一个问题。（同位语从句，不可用if 代替whether）
2．whether 引导的宾语从句可作介的宾语，而if 则不能。
It all depends on whether they will support us. 这完全取决于他们是否支持我们。
(不用if)
Ryan was worrying about whether he had hurt her feelings. 瑞恩担心是否伤害了
她的感情。
3．if 既可引导语从句，也可引导宾语从句。如果用if 会引起歧义，应避免使用if，而
用whether。
Please let me know if you want to join us. 请告诉我你是否想加入我们。（if 引导
的从句可被看成是宾语从句，if 表示是否）
Please let me know if you want to join us. 如果你想加入我们的话，请告诉我一声。
（if 引导的从句可被看成是条件状语从句，if 表示如果）
Please let me know whether you want t join us. 请告诉我你是否想加入我们。（为
避免引起歧义，可用whether 表示是否）
C．who, whom, whose, what, which
连接代词who, whom, whose, what, which 等在从句中既起连接作用，同时又担当主语、
8
宾语、定语、表语等成分。
No one knows who he was waiting for. 没人知道他当时在等谁。
We are worrying about what we should do next. 我们正在为下一步该怎么办而烦恼。
Tell me whos house it is. 告诉我这是谁的家。
Let me know which train you will be arriving on. 告诉我你将乘哪列火车到达。
D．where, when, how, why
连接副词where, when, how, why 等在从句中既是连接词，又作状语。
I don't know where we are going to have the meeting.我不知道我们将在哪儿开会。
She always thinks of how shecan work well. 她总是在想怎样能把工作做好。
What I am anxious to know is when we can visit the museum. 我急于知道我们什么
时候能参观博物馆。
比较：
when 引导的时间状语从句和名词性从句中的不同时态。
Please lt me know when you arrive. 你到的时候，请告诉我一声。（when 引导的是时
间状语从句，从句中用一般现在时来表示将来。）
Please let me know when you will arrive. 请告诉我你什么时候到。（when 引导的是
宾语从句，从句中用一般将来时。）
E．whoever, whomever, whatever, whichever, whosever
连接代词whoever = anyone who任何人, 无论谁；whatever =anything that 凡是...，
无论什么；whichever = anything that无论那一个, 任何一个；whomever = anyone whom
（whoever 的宾格形式）。
Whoever comes to the club is welcome. 不论谁来参加这个俱乐部都欢迎。
Whatever is worth doing at all is worth doing well.凡是值得做的就值得做好。
They ate whatever they could find o the deserted island. 他们在荒岛找到什么就
吃什么。
You may do whatever you will. 你可做任何你想做的事。
I'll take whichever book interests me.我愿买任何让我感兴趣的书。
Whosever book is overdue will be fined. 不管谁的书过期未还都要被罚款。
比较：
连接代词whoever 在宾语从句中作主语，whomever 作宾语从句中宾语。
You may offer he book to whoever wants it. 你可把这本书给任何想要的人。（此句
中不能使用whomever，因为whoever 在宾语从句中作wants it 的主语）
You may offer the book to whomever you like. 你可把这本书给任何你喜欢的人。
（whomever 在宾语从句中作you like 的宾语）
一、 表语从句
表语从句放在连系动词之后，充当复合句中的表语。
A．可接表语从句的连系动词
可接表语从句的连系动词有be, look, seem, sound, appear 等。
China is no longer what she used to be. 今日的中国不再是过去的中国了。
The question remains whether they will be able to help us. 问题还是他们能否帮
我们。
Itappears that he has a taste for music.看来他对音乐有一定的鉴赏力.
At that time, it seemed as if I couldn' t think of the right word anyhow. 当
时，我似乎怎么也想不出一个恰当的字眼来。
B．as, as ifthough 引导的表语从句
He looked just as he had looked ten years before. 他看起来还与十年前一样。
It sounds as ifsomeone is knocking at the door. 听起来好像有人在敲门。
C．because, why 引导的表语从句
I think it is because you are talking too much. 我想这是因为你话说得太多。
That's because he didn't understand me. 那是因为他没有理解我。（That's because
8
三 同位语从句
同位语从句用于对前面的名词作进一步解释，说明名词的具体内容。同位语从句一般由
that 引导，但也可以由whether 以及连接代词和连接副词引导。
A．同位语从句一般跟在名词fact, hope, idea, news, doubt, suggestion, information,
opinion, decision, discovery, truth, promise, statement, problem, rule 等的面。
They were all very much worried over the fact that you were sick. 对你生病这
件事，他们都很焦虑。
Where did you get the idea that I could not come 你在哪儿听说我不能来？
I have no idea whether he'll come or not. 我不知道他是否来。
We haven't yet settled the question where we are going t spend our summer vacation.
到哪儿去度暑假，这个问题我们还没有决定。
It is a question how he did it. 那是一个他如何做了此事的问题。
There is no doubt that we will win. 毫无疑问我们会赢的。
注意：
当含有同位语从句的主句谓语部分过短时，可以把谓语动词提前，使同位语从句与名词
隔开，以避免头重脚轻的现象。
Word came that Mr President would come and inspect ourschool himself. 有消息
说总统先生将亲自来视察我们学校。
B．使用虚拟语气的同位语从句
在一些表示建议、命令、要求的名词后的同位语从句中，谓语动词用should+动词原形表
示，should 可省略。
This is our only request that this (hould) be settled as soon as possible. 尽
快解决这个问题，这是我们唯一的请求。
He made the suggestion that we go by train. 他建议我们坐火车去。
8
第十章、定语从句
1、 定语从句在句中修饰某个名词或代词，被定语从句修饰的词叫先行词。定语从句需用下
列关联词：关系代词和关系副词。 它们起连词作用，本身做从句的主语、宾语、表语或定
语，本身在从句中作时间、地点或原因状语。 主要有who, whom, that, whose, which, as,
when, where, why。PS:what 不能引导定语从句. 指人的关系代词有who、whose、whom、
that. 指物的关系代词有which、whose(=of which)、that.
The old man who/whom /that we visited yesterday is a famous artist.
Miss Wang is taking care of the child whose parents have gone to Beijing .
The man with whom my father shook hands just now is our headmaster. （=The man
who/whom/ that my father shook hands with just now is our headmaster.）
I like the books which / that were written by Lu Xun.
The desks (which/that) we made last year were very good.
This is the house in which we lived last year. (= This is the house which /that we lived in last
year.)
I live in the room whose windows face south. (= I live in the room ,the windows of which face
south.)
2、 掌握以上关系代词、关系副词的含义及使用时，要特别注意以下几点：
1） 指人时宜用who 的情况：
a. 当先行词是 one, ones, anyone 或 those , these 时，关系代词用 who。
The comrade I want to learn from is the one who studies hard and works hard.
Anyone who breaks the law should be punished.
Anyone who goes there will be punished.
These who are going to Beijing are the best students of our school.
b. 在there be 开头的句子中。
There’s a beautiful girl who came to see you this morning.
There is a student who wants to see you.
c. 先行词后有一个较长的定语。
I met a foreigner in the city last week who could speak Chinese well.
d. 一个句子中带有两个定语从句，其中一个定语从句的关系代词是that，另一个宜用who，
8
以免重复。
The student that won the first prize is the monitor who works hards.
e. 在非限定性定语从句中。
She has a brother, who worked at that factory ten years ago.
2) 指物时宜用 that 的情况：
a. 当先行词为 all, none, much, little, few, something, anything, everything, nothing 等不定
代词时。
All that can be done has been done.
b. 当先行词既指人又指物时。
He spoke of the men and the thing (that) he had seen abroad.
c. 当先行词是疑问词 who, what, which 时或者句子以疑问词 who , what , which 打头时。
Who that has such a home doesn’t love it?
d. 先行词是序数词、形容词最高级 或者 当先行词被序数词或形容词的最高级修饰时。
This is one of the best films that I have ever seen.
This is the best that can be done now.
e. 当先行词被 the very, the only, the last, the same , just, one of , any, every , few , little , no ,
all , one of 等修饰时。
This is one of the very book that I am looking for.
f. 关系代词在从句中作表语。
Mary is no longer the girl that she used to be.
3) 只能用 which 不能用 that 的情况。
a. 引导非限定性定语从句修饰某物或整个句子。
Bruce went towards the fire, which was still smoking.
Tom came back late, which made his parents very angry.
b. 关系代词作介词的宾语。This is the house in which Lu Xun once lived.
c. that，those 作主语时
Those which are on the desk are English books.
4) 关系代词 as 和which 都能引导非限定性定语从句代表整个句子的内容，as 引导的从句
可位于句首或句末，which 引导的定语从句则不能位于句首。
Which you know, he is a good man. (×)
As you know, he is a good man. (√)
5)关系副词when, where, why 其含义相当于on which, in which , for which 等，可以互换：
The day when /on which I met him first was May 1st.
I don’t know the reason why /for which he didn’t come.
6)whose 指物时，可以与of which 等结构互换，但应注意与冠词的位置关系：
This is the book the cover of which / of which the cover / whose cover is blue.
7)有时可用that 代替关系副词。在口语中常省略。
This is the reason (why / for which / that) he came late.
9
8)先行词是专有名词、整个句子或世界上独一无二的物质名词时，一般用非限定性定语从句
修饰。
The sun, which gives us light and heat, is very big.
9)在先行词和定语从句之间有无逗号有时会引起名义的变化：
He said nothing that made her angry. 他没说使她生气的话。
He said nothing, which made her angry. 他一言不发，这使她很生气。
10) 部分短语动词中的介词不可与动词拆开，在定语从句中其介词不可前置，只能放在其动
词之后。
Is this the book which she is looking for?
The old man who/whom they are waiting for is Professor Li.
The child who/whom she is looking after is Wang Ping’s son.
11) 先行词前有such、the same、 as 时, 关系代词用as，不用that, 但the same…as…表示
同样的, the same…that…表示同一的。
He knows as many people as are present at the meeting.
Such people as you refer to are rare nowadays.
3、 定语从句与强调结构
It is the place where they lived before.
It is in the place that they lived before.
第一个句子为定语从句，where 指代the place，在定语从句中作状语，第二个句子为强调结
构，强调in the place, that 没有意义，把放回后面句子，句子意思完整。
Where is it that he found the lost watch? (强调句型，强调疑问副词where.)
Where is the watch he found yesterday? (定语从句，that 指代the watch.)
4、 定语从句中的先行词
Is this book the one that you bought yesterday?
Is this the book that you bought yesterday?
第一个句子中，this book 是主句的主语，the one 是先行词。在第二个句子中this 是主句的
主语，the book 是先行词。一定要避免出现：Is this book that you bought yesterday?
5、 定语从句与同位语从句
定语从句相当于形容词，它对先行词起修饰、描述或限制作用，而同位语从句则相当于名
词，对其前面的词给予说明或作进一步解释，即说明该词所表示的具体内容。例如：
The news that we heard is not true. (定语从句)
The news that he won the prize is not true. （同位语从句）
另: 在“have no idea ＋从句”结构中，其从句都作idea 的同位语。例如：
I have no idea when she will be back.
6. 限制性定语从句与非限制性定语从句的区别：
All the students who study hard have passed.
学习努力的学生都考试及格了。(只有努力的及格了，不努力的没及格。)
9
All the students ,who study hard have passed.
所有的学生都及格了，他们学习努力。（没有人不及格，这些学生都很努力。）
在限制性定语从句中，从句是先行词不可缺少的定语（如去掉，主句意思就不完整或
不正确。）从句与主句关系密切，不用逗号。译为汉语时，从句译在先行词前，与先行词用
“的”连接 。
在非限制性定语从句中，从句是对先行词的附加说明（如去掉，主句意思仍清楚，不
受影响。） 从句与主句关系不十分密切，用逗号与主句隔开。译为汉语时，从句放在主句
后面。
7. As 和which 的辨析关系。
○1.This elephant is like a snake, as /which everybody can see. =As everybody can see,
this elephant is like a snake. 任何人都看得出来，这头象像条蛇。
○2.Tom didn’t pass the physics exam, which made his parents very angry.
Tom 物理考试不及格，这使得他父亲很生气。
这两个例句中，as 和which 所代表的都是整个主句所表示的内容。但有两点不同之处：
a
．在形式上as 引导的非限制性定语从句可位于主句的后面，也可位于主句的前面；而
which 引导的非限制性定语从句只能位于主句的后面，不能位于主句的前面。
b．在意义上，as 引导的定语从句和主句的关系一般为一致关系，常译为“正如……”，
“就像……”，而which 引导的定语从句和主句的关系是因果关系，或which 引导的定语从
句是对主句的评论。因此，在意思通顺的情况下，which 可代替as，而as 许多时候不能代
替which，如句○2。
【当从句和主句语义一致时，用as，反之则用which。
She has married again, as was expected. She has married again, which was
unexpected.】
再如：
1)He was late again, as / which we had expected. =As we had expected, he was late
again.
正如我们所料，他又迟到了。/他又迟到了这是我们早就料到的。
2)The street hasn’t been cleared for weeks, which makes it very dirty.
街道好多星期没有打扫了，因此整条街很脏。（不用as）
3)The young man cheated his friend of much money, which was disgraceful.
那年轻人诈骗了他朋友许多钱财，这是不光彩的。（不 用as）
4)He takes exercise everyday, which has done a lot of good to his health.
他每天运动，这对他的身体很有好处。（不用as）
5)As has already been pointed out, English is rather difficult for a foreigner.
正如已经指出的那样，英语对于初学者说，是相当难学的。
c . as
在从句中作主语时，后面常接行为动词的被动语态，如be known，be said，be
reported 等，如从句中行为动词是主动语态，一般要用which 作主语。
She has been late again, as was expected.
Tom has made great progress, which made us happy.
9
d.
在such…as…、the same…as…、 as…、 as many…/much as…等结构中,as 不能用
which 代替。
1)Such books as this are too difficult for beginners.
这样的书对于初学的人来说是太难
了。
=Books such as this are …
=Books like this are …
2)I live in the same building as he (does).
我和他住再同一座大楼里。
3)He knows as many people as are present at the meeting.
他认识所有到会的人。
4)That day we all got up early as usual.
那天我们和平时一样，都起得很早。
“One of the +
复数名词”后面定语从句中谓语单复数情况
8. “One of the +复数名词”后面定语从句中谓语动词通常用复数形式，跟定语从句所靠
近的那个复数名词在数上保持一致。如：
1
）That is one of the books that are required for study at school.
2
）This is one of the most wonderful novels that have been published since 1990.
3
）She is one of the few persons who know Spanish .
4
）This is one of the most famous plays that were written in the thirties,
如果one of +复数名词这一结构前面带有the only、the very 之类的限定语，后面定语从
句的谓语动词则要用单数形式，这是因为定语从句在意义上修饰的是one 而不是那个复数
名词。如：
1)He is the only one of the teachers who knows French in our school.(
修饰the only
one)
He is one of the teachers who know French in our school.(
修饰the teachers)
2)This is the only one of the rooms that is free now. (
修饰the only one)
This is one of the rooms that are free now. (
修饰rooms)
9. 由关系副词when, where, why 所引导的定语从句。
a. when 在从句中作时间状语, 其先行词多为表示时间概念的名词。
We can never forget the day when HongKong returned to our homeland.
我们永远也不会忘记香港回归祖国的那一天。
b. where 在从句中作地点状语, 其先行词多为表示地点概念的名词。
The building w here you used to live has been pulled down.
你过去住的楼房已经被拆除了。
c.why 在从句中作原因状语, 其先行词多为表示原因概念的名词。
We know the reason why he was very angry.
我们知道他为什么那么生气。
This is the day when I joined the party/which he spent reading the books/which I still never
forget.
This is the place which we once visited/which I will never forget/which I am looking
for/where I found the book.
PS： 关系代词与关系副词之间并非毫无关联， 两者之间存在密切的联系。
1). 很多情况下关系副词用“介词＋which/whom”来代替， 其中的介词由先行词或定语从句
中谓语动词的形式来决定， 例如：
9
The day when I met the famous pop star was the greatest day of my life.
= The day on which I met the famous pop star was the greatest day of my life.
见到这位著名歌星的那天是我一生中最重要的日子。
I shall never forget those years when I lived with her.
= I shall never forget those years during which I lived with her.
我将永远不会忘记我跟她生活的那些岁月。
This is a hall where the medical conference will be held.
= This is a hall in which the medical conference will be held. 这是礼堂， 医学会议将在此
召开。
2). 并非先行词表示时间或地点时都分别用when 或where 来引导相应的定语从句， 若关
系词在修饰表示时间或地点的先行词的定语从句中充当主语、 宾语等而不是状语时， 需
用which 或that 引导相应的定语从句。
例如： Do you still remember the days which/that we spent together in school? 你还记得我
们一起在学校度过的那些日子吗？ 先行词the days 表时间， 但是其定语从句的引导词在
定语从句中作宾语而不是状语， 因此不能用when 而应该用which 或that。
3). that 有时可以代替定语从句中的关系副词when， where， why， 且that 常可以省略。
例如： This is the time （when/that） he arrived. 这是他到达的时间。
10. 考题训练。
［考题1］ We are living in an age ____ many things are done on computer.
A. which B. that C. whose D. when
［解析］ 本题中下划线处所引导的限定性定语从句修饰表示时间的先行词age， 其引导词
在该定语从句中充当时间状语， 因此只能填入关系副词when。
［考题2］ The film brought the hours back to me ____ I was taken good care of in that
far*9 鄄away village.
A. until B. that C. when D. where
［解析］ 本题中下划线处所引导的限定性定语从句修饰表示时间的先行词hours， 其引导
词在该定语从句中充当时间状语， 因此只能填入关系副词when。
［考题3］ It was an exciting moment for these football fans this year, ____ for the first time
in years their team won the World Cup. （2000 北京、 安徽春）
A. that B. while C. which D. when
［解析］ 本题中下划线处所引导的非限定性定语从句修饰表示时间的先行词moment， 其
引导词在该定语从句中充当时间状语， 因此只能填入关系副词when。
［考题4］ After living in Paris for fifty years he returned to the small town ____ he grew up
as a child. （1996）
A. which B. where C. that D. when
［解析］ 本题中下划线处所引导的限定性定语从句修饰表示地点的先行词town， 其引导
词在该定语从句中充当地点状语， 因此只能填入关系副词where。
［考题5］ We will be shown around the city: schools, museums, and some other places, ____
other visitors seldom go. （2002 北京）
A. what B. which C. where D. when
［解析］ 本题中下划线处所引导的非限定性定语从句修饰表示地点的先行词some other
places， 其引导词在该定语从句中充当地点状语， 因此只能填入关系副词where。
［考题6］ I walked in our garden, ____ Tom and Jim were tying a big sign onto one of the
9
trees. （2005 辽宁）
A. which B. when C. where D. that
［解析］ 本题中下划线处所引导的定语从句修饰表示地点的先行词garden 并在该定语从
句中充当地点状语， 因此只能填入关系副词where。
［考题7］ We’re just trying to reach a point ____ both sides will sit down together and talk.
（2006 山东）
A. where B. that C. when D. which
［解析］ point 可以理解成地点、 位置， 其后面的定语从句中缺少地点状语， 因此下划
线处只能填入引导词where
［答案］ D C D B C C A
11. 定语从句专项练习。
1、The knife
we used to cut the bread is very sharp.
A．which
B．with
C．with it
D．with which
2、The brave man,
the tiger was shot, is a good hunter.
A．of whom
B．by that
C．by whom
D．by which
3、The clever boy made a hole in the wall,
he could see what it was going on
inside the house.
A．on which
B．at which
C．through which D．in which
4、The beautiful dress
Miss Jones went to the ball was borrowed from a
friend of hers.
A．in which
B．worn by
C．through which D．on which
5、During the days
, he worked as a servant at the Browns’.
A．that followed
B．to follow
C．following
D．followed
6、You may take anything useful
.
A．which you want
B．you want them
C．what you want
D．you want
7、My hometown is no longer the same
it used to be.
A．like
B．that
C．as
D．which
8、The old woman has two sons, one
is a teacher.
A．of who
B．of whom
C．of which
D．of them
9、You can take any seat
is free.
A．in which
B．that
C．where
D．which
10、Is there anything
to you?
A．that belong
B．which belongs
C．that belongs
D．that is belonged
11、We hope to get such a tool
he is using.
A．where
B．that
C．as
D．which
12、Finally came the day
he had to begin his study for the next term.
A．till
B．that
C．since
D．which
13、She hasn’t got enough money
she buys the rings.
A．for which B．with which
C．that
D．which
9
14、I’ve read all the books
were borrowed from the library.
A．they
B．which
C．/
D．that
15、This is the best hotel in the city
I know.
A．it
B．where
C．that
D．which
16、Is oxygen the only gas
helps fire burn?
A．it
B．which
C．/
D．that
17、The Second World War
millions of people were killed ended in 1945.
A．on which
B．where
C．in that
D．during which
18、The train
she was traveling was late
A．on that
B．for which C．on which
D．which
19、Winter is the time of year
the days are short and nights are long.
A．on which
B．that
C．when
D．where
20、I’ll show you a store
you may buy all
you need.
A．that, that
B．which, that
C．where, which
D．in which, /
21、I still remember the day
she first wore that pink dress.
A．on which
B．on that
C．in which
D ．which
22、Do you know the reason
she got so angry yesterday ?
A．why
B．which
C．for that
D．for why
23、Is
some German friends visited last week ?
A．this school where
B．this school one
C．this the school
D．this school
24、Is there any one in your class
family is in the city.
A．whose
B．which
C．who’s
D．who
25、Can you lend me the book
the other day ?
A．which you talked
B．that you talked
C．about that you talked
D．you talked about
26、This is one of the best films
this year.
A．which has been shown
B．that have been shown
C．that have shown
D．have been shown
27、Do you know the man
?
A．that I spoke
B．I spoke to
C．to who I spoke
D．whom I spoke
28、There are two thousand students in our school,
are girls.
A．two-thirds in which
B．two-thirds in them
C．two-thirds of them
D
．of whom two thirds
29、I have bought two ball-pens,
writes well.
A．neither of them
B．none of them
C．neither of which
D．none of which
30、He built a telescope
he could study the skies.
A．by it
B．through which
C．with that
D．in which
31、Do you know the reason
he was late?
A．for which B．for what
C．which
D．that
32、
has been said above, grammar is a set of dead rules.
9
A．As
B．That
C．What
D．Which
33、John got beaten in the game,
had been expected.
A．who
B．what
C．that
D．as
34、They’re invented me to their party,
is kind of them.
A．this
B．that
C．which
D．as
35、Crusoe’s dog became ill and died,
made him very lonely.
A．this
B．that
C．which
D．as
36、There isn’t so much noise in the country
in big cities.
A．as
B．where
C．which
D．that
37、I often thought of my childhood,
I lived on a farm.
A．who
B．when
C．where
D．which
38、Next month,
you’ll be in your hometown, is coming.
A．where
B．when
C．that
D．which
39、The next thing
must be done is to make a plan.
A．which
B．that
C．when
D．/
40、He talked happily about the men and books
interested him greatly in the
school.
A．that
B．when
C．who
D．which
Ⅱ、Fill in the blanks：
1、This is the professor
taught me chemistry in 1980 .
2、The hospital
was built five years ago has been modernized.
3、This is the boy
father died three years ago.
4、The film
we saw the day before yesterday is very interesting.
5、Do you know the student
was praised at the meeting?
6、1949 is the year
the People’s Republic of China was founded.
7、They work in a factory
makes radio parts.
8、They work in a factory
radio parts are made.
9、This is the vision phone through
we can see and talk to our friends.
10、Here are players from Japan, some of
are our old friends.
11、She lives in a small village,
is only three miles from here.
12、She is going to spend the summer holidays in Shanghai,
she has some
friends.
13、We’ll put off the meeting till next week,
we won’t be so busy.
14、The sun gives the earth light and heat,
is very important to the living
things.
15、Those
want to go to the computer room write your names here.
16、He was often late,
made his teacher very angry.
17、Who is the person
is standing at the gate?
18、He talked about the teachers and schools
he had visited.
Ⅲ、Correct the mistakes in the following sentences if there are any:
1、He told us about the countries where he had visited.
9
2、Egypt is a country where is famous for its pyramids.
3、China is the country where he spent the best part of his life.
4、The days when we spent together cannot be easily forgotten.
5、The house stands at the place that the two roads meet.
6、We shall visit the college where his father teaches there.
7、I know the reason that she looks so worried.
8、He left me the book, that is very useful for me.
9、This is the room which food is kept.
10、April 15, 1976 is the day when we’ll never forget.
11、The man came yesterday is our English teacher.
12、The students are playing football on the playground are of Class Two .
13、This is all which I can do for you.
14、Can you think of anyone who’s house was here?
15、The watch that Mother bought it for me works very well.
16、This is the only book that were borrowed from the library.
17、The day which she had to leave arrived at last.
18、The doctor whom they want to see have come.
19、Do you know the young man whom has been chosen chairman?
20、The park stands at the place that the two rivers meet.
21、A plane is a machine can fly.
22、It is one of the best pictures which have been sold.
23、Those that want to go put up your hands.
24、This is the knife with that the doctor did the operation.
25、Who is the man whom you said hello just now?
【定语从句专项练习参考答案】:
Ⅰ、1、D
2、C
3、C
4、A
5、A
6、D
7、C
8、B
9、D
10、C
11、C
12、B
13、B
14、D
15、C
16、D
17、D
18、C
19、C
20、D
21、A
22、A
23、C
24、A
25、D
26、B
27、B
28、D
29、C
30、B
31、A
32、A
33、D
34、C
35、C
36、A
37、B
38、B
39、B
40、A
Ⅱ、1、who / that
2、which / that
3、whose
4、which / that
5、who / that
6、when
7、which / that
8、where
9、which
10、whom
11、which
12、where
9
13、when
14、which
15、who
16、which
17、that
18
、that
Ⅲ、1、where—that
2、where—which
3、√
4、when—that / which
5、that—where
6、去掉there
7、that—why
8、that—which
9、which—where
10、when—which / that
11、man 后面加who 12、students 后面加who
13、which—that
14 、who’s—whose
15、去掉it
16、were—was
17、which—when
18、have—has
19、whom—who
20、that—where
21、machine 后面加which / that
22
、which—that
23、that—who
24、that—which
25
、whom—that
第十一章、状语从句
第一节 基本知识与基本概念
【什么是状语从句？】
状语一般指的是在句子中起着副词作用的成分。顾名思义，状语从句就是在句子中像
副词那样修饰主句的从句。在实际使用中，状语从句一般可以分为：时间、地点、条件、
原因、结果、目的、让步、比较、方式状语从句等。
【状语从句的基本出题思路】
状语从句主要考查的是考生准确地判断主句和从句之间关系的能力。即考生应该能准确
地定位该从句是何种状语从句，进而准确地选择适当的选项。 如：
I always take some money with me _______ I got fined on the road.
A. so that
B. in case C.
before D.
where
答案：B。
解析：这是一个典型的状语从句的考题。四个选项中，A 表示的是目的，
“为了”；B 是条件，“以防”；C 是时间，“在…之前”；D 是地点。题干的意思是“我带
一点钱，以防在路上挨罚。”所以答案应该是B。
从这个典型题上可以看出，状语从句题目的关键在于两个坎，其一是翻译，即能够准确地
翻译题干的能力；其二是记忆，即准确地记住每一个连接词的意义和功能。二者缺一不可。
可以看作是解决状语从句题目的金钥匙。
【高考在状语从句上考查得重点】
从２０００年到２００６年，全国各地的高考单项选择题中，状语从句一直是一个
很稳定的考点，复现率几乎是１００％。从题目的数量上看，时间状语从句等几个是绝对
9
“主力”。请看下表：
时间状语从
句
23
让步状语从
句
17
条件状语从
句
12
原因状语从
句
7
地点状语从
句
6
目的状语从
句
4
比较状语从
句
1
结果状语从
句
1
我们基本上可以看出，考查比较多的状语从句多是引导词特别丰富多彩的从句。因此，
我们学习的重点也应该放在这些引导词多变的从句上。对一些重点地引导词给予特别的注
意。
【时间状语从句的引导词】
after, before, once, since, till, until, when, whenever, while, as soon as, immediately,
directly, instantly, the moment, the minute, the second, the instant, the day, the year, every
time, each time, by the time, next time, last time, the first time, no sooner…than, hardly…
when, scarcely… when, barely…when.
【让步状语从句的引导词】
though, although, as, even if, even though, granting (that), granted (that), admitting (that),
for all that, in spite of the fact that, despite the fact that, regardless of the fact that, while,
wh-ever, no matter wh-, whether…or
【条件状语从句的引导词】
if, unless, only if, provide/ providing/ provided（that）
“假如”, in case（that）= in the event
that“如果”,so long as = as long as, on condition that = on the understanding that “条
件是”,suppose = supposing“如果”, once 等。
【原因状语从句的引导词】
because, since, as, now (that), in that, seeing (that), considering (that), on the ground that,
by reason that, for the reason that, for fear that, on account of the fact that, in view of the
fact that, because of the fact that, due to the fact that, owing to the fact that, not that…but
that
【地点状语从句的引导词】
where, wherever, anywhere, everywhere
【目的状语从句的引导词】
so that, in order that, lest, for fear that, in case
【比较状语从句的引导词】
as…as, (not) so …as, more…than, the more…,the more…
1
【结果状语从句的引导词】
so…that, that such (a/an)…that, so that, that, with the result that
such that, to such an
extent that, to such a degree that, as far as, so/as far as
【方式状语从句的引导词】
as, as if, as though, the way (that/ in which), how
第二节
考点分类解析
【考点一：when, while, as 的区别问题】
三者都有“当…时候”之意。但when 后面既可以跟瞬间性动词，也可以跟延续性动词；
while 和as 后面都只能跟延续性动词，且while 侧重于两种情况的对比而as 则强调的是两
个动作同步进行。如：
I was reading a book when my father came in.
I was reading a book while my wife was preparing dinner.
Tom sang a popular song as he went home.
【考点二：名词作连词用引导时间状语从句的问题】
the moment, the minute, the second, the instant, the day, the year, every time, each time,
by the time, next time, last time, the first time 等名词经常可以作连词用引导时间状语从句。
如：
I gave her the money I owed her the moment I met her.
He was reading some book every time I saw him.
Your uncle will have left for New York by the time you arrive.
Jack was pretty fat the last time we saw each other.
【考点三：副词作连词用引导时间状语从句的问题】
immediately, directly, instantly
等副词经常被用作连词来引导时间状语从句，意思与 “as
soon as”相似。如：
The girl rushed into the room immediately she heard the shout.
Mike drove home to watch the live game instantly he finished his work.
【考点四：hardly…when…与no sooner… than…的区别问题】
这两个结构的意思相同，都有“as soon as”的意思。不过，需要注意的有两个细节：一、
当hardly 和no sooner 放在句首时，后面应该跟上过去完成时的倒装结构。二、后面的when
和than 不能互换。这一点需要死记硬背。
另外，hardly…when…还有几个变体，scarcely… when, barely…when，意思何用法完全
一致。如：
We had hardly begun when we were told to stop.
（不倒装结构）
Hardly had we begun when we were told to stop. （倒装结构）
No sooner had we begun than we were told to stop.
【考点五：与since 有关的考点问题】
since 在引导时间状语从句时，一般指的是“从过去的某一点时间以来”的概念。所以，
从句常用一般过去时，主句常用一般时态或完成时态。如：
I have never seen him again since he left here.
You hometown has changed a lot since you last saw it.
It is years since I enjoyed myself so much.
It is five years since he drove a plane.
1
如果是表示到过去某一时间前的情况，则主句用过去时，从句用过去完成时。如：
It was quite a long time since they had got to know each other.
It was only a few months since he wife passed away.
还有一个非常令同学们挠头的问题，就是since 引导的时间状语从句中不用瞬间性动词，
而用延续性动词，这时候的翻译就是问题了。如:
How long is it since you smoked?
你不抽烟多长时间了?
It is quite a few years since he was married.
他离婚已有好几年了。
It is almost ten years since I studied in that university.
我从那所大学毕业已经快有10 年了。
It is twenty years since I was a soldier, so I don’t know how to use a gun now.
我退役都20 年了,所以都不会用枪了。
【考点六：before 作连词用的问题】
before
作介词的用法大家一般都没有什么问题.它在作连词时表示时间上 “在…之前”。
经常翻译成 “…才…”或 “…就…”.有时候也有可能翻译成 “不愿”,相当于 rather than” 。
如：
The thief rushed off the bus before the policeman caught him.
警察还没来得及抓住他，小偷就窜下了汽车。
The girl waited for more than 3 hours before the man turned up.
姑娘等了３个多小时小伙子才露面。
It will be more than a decade before everything returns to normal.
要再过十几年一切才能恢复正常。
Let me tell you the news before I forget.
趁我还没忘记，告诉你点消息。
I would shoot myself before I apologize to him.
我宁死也不向他道歉。
【考点七：与until 相关的考点问题】
一、not…until 结构：
He didn’t appear until the concert ended.
Mary didn’t get married until she was in her thirties.
二、not… until 结构的倒装句：
Not until the concert ended did he appear.
Not until she was in her thirties did Mary get married.
三、not … until 结构的倒装句的强调句型：
It was not until the concert ended that he appeared.
It was not until she was in her thirties that Mary got married.
【考点八：for 用作连词的问题】
because, since, as, for 均可以引导时间状语从句。但有其细微的区别。
Because 表示直接原因，回答why 提出的问题；一般放在主句之后，也可单独存在。
如：
We didn’t come on time because our car broke down on the way.
They stayed at home because the weather was not suitable for a picnic.
Since 则侧重于主句，从句表示显然的或已知的理由，经常翻译成“既然”。如：
Since everyone is here, let get started.
Since you have known everything, I will shut up.
1
As 一般可以被看作是because 的非正式语气用词。用法和because 差不多。如：
As it was late, I have to go.
For 多表示附加或推断的理由，引导的分句前常有逗号，且通常不放在句首。如：
It must be very late, for the street is empty.
It must have rained last night, for the ground is wet.
He must have passed the test, for he is all smiles today.
The day breaks, for the birds are singing.
【考点九：when 引导条件状语从句的问题】
when 在引导从句时，一般都表示时间。但也有一些考题考查它表示条件的一面，这时，
它的意思是：“既然；考虑到”，差不多等于since, considering that。如：
How can they learn anything when they spend all their spare time watching television?
Why do you want a new car when you have such an expensive one?
【考点十：结果状语从句用so…that 还是用such…that 的问题】
在二者修饰可数名词单数时，大家一般都没有问题，因为，这时我们有不定冠词a 作
为提示，如：
This is such a beautiful watch that we all love it.
This is so beautiful a watch that we all love it.
但是，当他们修饰的可数名词复数或不可数名词时，就没有这个a 来作参照物了。这
时，一律用such。如：
It was such good weather that we decided to camp in the mountains.
They are such perfect books that many people are rushing to buy them.
当然，还有例外，那就是当名词前的限定词是many, much, few, little(少)时，用so。如：
He had so many friends here that it was impossible to invite everyone.
It is pretty shocking to see that in such a rich country there should be so many beggars.
There was so much pressure on his mind that he suffered insomnia(失眠症).
【考点十一：as 引导让步状语从句的问题】
as 引导让步状语从句时，句子顺序比较特殊：词＋as(though)+主语＋谓语，．．．。这个
“词”，可以是非常丰富的：名词、形容词、动词、副词等。值得一提的是，如果是可数名
词单数放在前面，一般不用不定冠词。如：
Girl as she is, she is very aggressive. ＝Although she is a girl, ….
Young as he is, he has made many major discoveries. ＝ Although he is young, ….
Hard as you may try, you can never beat him. ＝ Although you may try hard, ….
Try as you may, you can never beat him. ＝ Although you may try, ….
注意：这个句型中的as 都可以换成though,但不是although。
【考点十二：while 引导让步状语从句的问题】
while 在引导不同的从句时有着不同的意思和功能。在正式的书面文体中，while 经常
被用来代替although 引导让步状语从句。如：
While I admit that there are problems, I don’t agree that they can’t be solved.
While teaching seems easy to do, it is fairly difficult to be a qualified teacher.
第三节 巩固练习
（一）、【夯实基础】
1
1. ---Was his father very strict with him when he was at school? (2003 春/北京)
---Yes. He had never praised him _____ he became one of the top students in his grade.
A. after
B. unless
C. until
D. when
2. Someone called me up in the middle of the night, but they hung up _____ I could answer
the phone. (2000 NMET)
A. as
B. since
C. until
D. before
3. ---Did you remember to give Mary the money you owed her? (2001 春/北京)
---Yes, I gave it to her ______ I saw her.
A. while
B. the moment
C. suddenly
D. once
4. The man will have to wait all day ______ the doctor works faster. (2001 春/北京)
A. if
B. unless
C. whether
D. that
5. I thought her nice and honest ____ I met her. (1998 上海)
A. first time
B. for the first time
C. the first time
D. by the first time
6. John shut everybody out of the kitchen _____ he could prepare his grand
surprise.(2002 )
A. which
B. when
C. so that
D. as if
7. ---What was the party like?
---Wonderful. It’s years _____ I enjoyed myself so much.(1993)
A. after
B. when
C. before
D. since
8. John plays football _____, if not better than, David.
A. as well B. as well as
C. so well
D. so well as
9. Mother was worried because little Alice was ill, especially _____ Father was away in
France.
A. as
B. that
C. during
D. if
10. If we work with a strong will, we can overcome any difficulty, _____ great it is.
A. what
B. how
C. however
D. whatever
11. --- I’m going to the post office.
--- _______ you’re there, can you get me some stamps? （1999）
A. As
B. While
C. Because
D. If
12. My uncle ______ until he was forty-five. （上海2000）
A. married
B. didn’t marry
C. was not marrying
D. would marry
13. It was not ______ she took off her dark glasses ______ I realized she was a famous film
star.
A. when, that
B. until, that
C. until, when
D. when, then
14. Scarcely ___ the phone rang again.
A. did he sit down when
B. had he sat down when
C. did he sit down then
D. had he sat down and
15. Time passed quickly and three weeks went by ______ we knew it.
A. before
B. after
C. when
D. till
16. I didn’t wait a moment, but came ______ you called.
A. suddenly
B. at once
C. immediately
D. right away
17. She found her calculator ______ she lost it. （上海2000）
A. where
B. when
C. in which
D. that
18. After the war, a new school building was put up _______ there had once been a theatre.
1
（1997）
A. that
B. where
C. which
D. when
19. You should make it a rule to leave things ______ you can find them again.（1999）
A. when
B. where
C. then
D. there
20. ______ you’ve got a chance, you might as well make full use of it.（1999）
A. Now that B. After
C. Although D. As soon as
21. He was walking along the sands _____ he saw a big footprint in the sand.
A. while
B. when
C. as
D. which
22. I don’t think you’ll be able to understand that ______ you are my age.
A. even
B. only when
C. as if
D. even when
23. She told us _______ story that we all forgot about the time.
A. such an interesting
B. such interesting a
C. so an interesting
D. a so interesting
24. Joan had ______ little trouble with the test that she left twenty minutes earlier.
A. such
B. so
C. very
D. such a
25. ______, Mother will wait for him to have dinner together. （1997）
A. However late is he
B. However he is late
C. However is he late
D. However late he is
26. We’ll have to finish the job, _____. （1999）
A. long it takes however
B. it takes however long
C. long however it takes
D. however long it takes
27. The WTO cannot live up to its name ______ it does not include a country that is home to
one fifth of mankind. （2000）
A. as long as
B. while
C. if
D. even though
28. ______ your composition carefully, some spelling mistakes can be avoided. （上海1999）
A. Having checked
B. Check
C. If you check
D. To check
29. I will lend you my computer _____ you look after it.
A. providing B.
in case C.
unless D.
until
30. Your dreams will come true _______ you stop trying half way.
A. unless B.
if C.
granting D.
whenever
(二)、【真题实战之2007】
1. I won’t call you, ________ something unexpected happens. ( 全国I)
A. unless B.
whether C.
because D.
while
2. We all know that, __________, the situation will get worse. ( 全国I)
A. not if dealt carefully with B. if not carefully dealt with
C. if dealt not carefully with
D. not if carefully dealt with
3. You will be successful in the interview
you have confidence. （福建卷）
A. before
B. once
C. until
D. though
4. He was told that it would be at least three more months he could recover and return to
work. （江西卷）
A. when B. before C. since D. that
5. Though he started late, Mr. Guo played the piano as well as, if , David
（陕西卷）
A. not better than B. not better
C. no better than D. better
6. Many of them turned a deaf ear to his advice, _______ they knew it to be valuable. （浙江
卷）
A. as if B.
now that C.
even though D.
so that
7. It _____ we had stayed together for a couple of weeks ____ I found we had a lot in
1
common. （浙江卷）
A. was until; when B.
was until; that C.
wasn’t until; when D.
wasn’t until;
that
8. It is difficult for us to learn a lesson in life ________ we’ve actually had that lesson. （天津
卷）
A. until
B. after
C. since
D. when
9. ---Where’s that report?
---I brought it to you ____you were in Mr. Black’s office yesterday. （北京卷）
A. if B.
when C.
because D.
before
10. Leave your key with a neighbor _____ you lock yourself out one day.（北京卷）
A. ever since B. even if C.
soon after D.
in case
11. I'd like to study law at university ________ my cousin prefers geography. (四川卷)
A.
though B.
as
C. while D.
for
12. My parents live in a small village. They always keep candles in the house _____ there is a
power out. （重庆卷）
A. if
B. unless
C. in case
D. so that
13. The field research will take Joan and Paul about five months; it will be a long time _____
we meet them again. (安徽卷)
A.
after B.
before C.
since
D. when
14. Having checked the doors were closed, and _________ all the lights were off, the
boy
opened the door to his bedroom. (湖南卷)
A. why B.
that C.
when D.
where
15. Most birds find it safe to sleep in the trees, but ________ they have eggs or young chicks,
they don’t use a nest. (湖南卷)
A. why B.
how C.
unless D.
where
16. ________ I really don’t like art, I find his work impressive. （山东卷）
A. As
B. Since
C. If
D. While
17. We had to wait half an hour _____ we had already booked a table. (辽宁卷)
A. since B. although
C. until
D. before
18. Pop music is such an important part of society ______ it has even influenced our
language.
A. as
B. that
C. which
D. where
19. Small sailboats can easily turn over in the water ______ they are not managed carefully.
A. though
B. before
C. until
D. if
(三)、【真题实战之2006】
1. _______ environmental damage is done, it takes many years for the ecosystem ( 生态系统)
to recover. （江苏卷）
A. Even if
B. If only
C. While
D. Once
2. ______he has limited technical knowledge, the old worker has a lot of experience. (全国I)
A. Since B.
Unless C.
As D. Although
3. ----How long do you think it will be ______China sends a manned spaceship to the moon?
-----Perhaps two or three years. ( 福建卷)
A. when
B. until C. that D. before
4. A man cannot smile like a child, _________a child smiles with is eyes, while a man smiles
1
with his lips alone. ( 湖南卷)
A. so B.
but C.
and D.
for
5. I had just stepped
out of the bathroom and was busily drying myself with a towel
_________I heard the steps. ( 湖南卷)
A. while B.
when C. since D. after
6. In time of serious accidents, ____ we know some basic things about first aid, we can save
lives.
A. whether B. until
C. if
D. unless (
重庆卷)
7. In peace, too, the Red Cross is expected to send help________ there is human suffering.
A.
whoever B.
however C. whatever D. wherever
（江西卷）
8. ________ you have tried it, you can’t imagine how pleasant it is. （北京卷）
A. Unless
B. Because
C. Although
D. When
9. Jenny was very sad over the loss of the photos she had shot at Canada,
this was
a memory she especially treasured. ( 广东卷)
A.
as B.
if C.
when D.
where
10. "You can't have this football back
you promise not to kick it at my cat again,"
the old man said firmly. ( 广东卷)
A.
because B.
since C.
when D.
until
11. How can you expect to learn anything ____ you never listen? (山东卷)
A. in case B. even if C. unless D. when
12. This is a very interesting book. I’ll buy it, __________. (陕西卷)
A. how much may it cost B.
no matter how it may cost
C. however much it may cost D.
how may it cost
13. —Mom, what did the doctor say?
—He advised mo to live______ the air is fresher. ( 四川卷)
A. in where
B. in which
C. the place where
D. where
14. He was about halfway through his meal
a familiar voice came to his ears.
A. why
B. where
C. when
D. while （辽宁卷）
15. The cost of living in Glasgow is among the lowest in Britain,
the quality of life is
probably one of the highest. (天津卷)
A. since B.
when C.
as D.
while
16. If you are traveling
the customs are really foreign to your own, please do as the
Romans do. ( 天津卷)
A. in which B.
what C.
when D.
where
17. ___ most of the earth’s surface is covered by water, fresh water is very rare and precious.
A. As
B. Once
C. If D. Although (
上海卷)
18. His plan was such a good one _________we all agreed to accept it. (陕西卷)
A. so B.
and C.
that D.
as
(四)、【真题实战之2005】
1. They wanted to charge $5000 for the car, ____ we managed to bring the price down.
(
全国I)
A.
but B.
so C. when D. since
2. I always take something to read when I go to the doctor’s ____ I have to wait.
1
(全国II)
A. in case B. so that C. in order D. as if
3. I’d like to arrive 20 minutes early ____ I can have time for a cup of tea. ( 北京卷)
A.
as soon as B. as a result C. in case D. so that
4. He tried his best to solve the problem, _____ difficult it was. (天津卷)
A.
however B. no matter C. whatever D. although
5. --- Did Jack come back early last night?
--- Yes. It was not yet eight o’clock _____ he arrived home. (
福建卷)
A.
before B. when C. that D. until
6. It is known to all that _____ you exercise regularly, you won’t keep good health.
(
重庆卷)
A.
unless B.
whenever C. although D. if
7. ______, he talks a lot about his favorite singers after class. ( 重庆卷)
A. A quiet student as he may be
B. Quiet student as he may be
C. Be a quiet student as he may
D. Quiet as he may be a student
8. Allow children the space to voice their opinions, ____ they are different for your own.
(
湖南卷)
A.
until B. even if C. unless D. as though
9. The more I think about him, the more reasons I find for loving him ___ I did.
(湖南卷)
A. as much as B. as long as C. as soon as D. as far as
10. The old tower must be saved, ____ the cost. (浙江卷)
A.
however B. whatever C. whichever D. wherever
11. There was never any time for Kate to feel lonely, ____ she was an only child.
(
辽宁卷)
A.
ever since B. now that C. even though D. even as
12. Your uncle seems to be a good driver; _____, I wouldn’t dare to travel in his car.
(
江西卷)
A.
even so B. even though C. therefore D. so
13. You must keep on working in the evening, ____ you are sure you can finish the task in
time. (安徽卷)
A.
as B. if C. when
D. unless
14. That was really a splendid evening. It’s years ____ I enjoyed myself so much.
A.
when B. that C. before D. since ( 安徽卷)
15. ______, Carolina couldn’t get the door open. ( 广东卷)
A.
Might she as try B.
As she might try
C.
She might as try D.
Try as she might
16. You’d better take something to read when you go to see the doctor ___ you have to wait.
(广东卷)
A.
even if B. in case C. as if D. in order that
17. The American Civil War lasted four years_____ the North won in the end. ( 广东卷)
A.
after B. when C. before D. then
18. Unlike watching TV, reading is a highly active process(
过程) ______ it requires
attention as well as memory and imagination. (江苏卷)
1
A.
until B. but C.
unless D. for
19. It is almost five years ____ we saw each other last time. ( 北京春招)
A.
before B. since C. after D. when
20. Simon thought his computer was broken _____ his little brother pointed out that he
had forgotten to turn it on. (北京春招)
A.
until B. unless C. after D. because
21. It was some time _____ we realized the truth. (山东卷)
A.
when B. until C. since D. before
(五)、【真题实战之2004】
1. Roses need special care _____ they can live through winter. ( 全国I)
A. because B.
so that C. even if D. as
2. There were dirty marks on her trousers ____ she had wiped her hands. ( 全国II)
A.
where B. which C. when D. that
3. _____ you call me to say you’re not coming, I’ll see you at the theatre. ( 全国II)
A.
Though B. Whether C. Until D. Unless
4. I do every single bit of housework ____ my husband Bob just does the dishes now and
then. ( 全国III)
A.
since B. while C. when D. as
5. Jasmine was holidaying with her family in a wildlife park ____ she was bitten on the leg
by a lion. (上海卷)
A.
when B. while C. since D. once
6. Parents should take seriously their children’s requests for sunglasses ____ eye
protection is necessary in sunny weather. (上海卷)
A. because B.
though C. unless D. if
7. It was evening ____ we reached the little town of Winchester. ( 天津卷)
A.
that B. until C. since D. before
8. There are many kinds of sports, ____ my favorite is swimming. ( 辽宁卷)
A.
as B.
then C. so D. but
9. We were told that we should follow the main road ____ we reached the central railway
station. (辽宁卷)
A.
whenever B. until C. while D. wherever
10. ______ I accept that he is not perfect, I do actually like the person. ( 江苏卷)
A.
While B. Since C. Before D. Unless
11. He got to the station early, _____ missing his train. ( 江苏卷)
A. in case of
B. instead of C. for fear of D. in search of
12. _______ modeling business is by no means easy to get into, the good model will always
be in demand. (浙江卷)
A.
While B. Since C. As D. If
13. Scientists say it may be five or six years _____ it is possible to test this medicine on
human patients. (福建卷)
A.
since B. after C. before D. when
14. It was with great joy _____ he received the news that his lost daughter had been found.
(福建卷)
1
A.
because B. which C. since D. that
15. You can eat food free in my restaurant _____ you like. ( 重庆卷)
A.
whenever B. wherever C. whatever D. however
16. We were swimming in the lake ____ suddenly the storm started. ( 北京春招)
A.
when B. while C. until D. before
17. ______ I can see, there is only one possible way to keep away from the danger.
A. As long as
B. As far as C. Just as D. Even if ( 北京春招)
18. ______, I have to put it away and focus my attention on study this week. ( 上海春招)
A. However the story is amusing
B. No matter amusing the story is
C. However amusing the story is
D. No matter how the story is amusing
19. You should try to get a good night’s sleep _____ much work you have to do.
A.
however B. no matter C. although D.
whatever ( 湖北卷)
参考答案：
（一）、【夯实基础】
1-5 CDBBC 6-10 CDBAC 11-15 BBBBA 16-20 CABBA 21-25 BDABD
26-30 DCCAA
(二)、【真题实战之2007】
1-5 ABBBA 6-10
CDABD 11-15 CCBBC 16-19 DBBD
(三)、【真题实战之2006】
1-5 DDDDB 6-10 CDAAD 11-15 DCDCD 16-18 DDC
(四)、【真题实战之2005】
1-5 AADAB 6-10 ABBAB 11-15 CADDD 16-20 BCDBA 21.D
(五)、【真题实战之2004】
1-5 BADBA 6-10 ADDBA
11-15 CACDA 16-19ABCA
1
第十二章、直接引语和间接引语
引述某人的话一般采用两种形式：一种是直接引语（Direct Speech ），即原封不动地引用原
话，把它放在引号内；另一种是间接引语（Indirect Speech），即用自己的话加以转述，被转述
的内容不放在引号内。
一、 直接引语变间接引语
A． 陈述句的间接引语
直接引语是陈述句，变为间接引语时，在多数情况下都构成一个that 引导的宾语从句，引
述动词通常是say, tell 等。与此同时，间接引语中的人称、时态和其他方面也要相应有所变化。
The foreigner aid to me, I like Beijing very much. 那老外告诉我：我很喜欢北京。
→ The foreigner told me that he she liked Beijing very much. 那老外告诉我说他（她）很喜欢
北京。
She said, We are very fond of sports. 她说：我们都喜欢体育运动。
→ She said that they were very fond of sports. 她说他（她）们都喜欢体运动。
I'll go over the grammar lesson once again, he said. 他说：我将把语法课再复习一遍。
→ He said he would go over the grammar lesson once again. 他说他将要把语法课再复习一
遍。（that 可省略）
B． 疑问句的间接引语
1．一般疑问句和反意疑问句
一般疑问句改为间接引语时，要用陈述语序，并要加连词if 或 whether，其主句动词常用ask,
wonder, want to know, didn't know 等。句末不用问号。
My teacher asked me, Do you like American country music 我老师问我：你喜欢美国乡村音乐
吗？
→ My teacher asked me if/whether I liked American country music. 我老师问我是否喜欢美
1
国乡村音乐。
You haven't been to Beijing, have you asked he. 他问：你没去过北，是吗？
→ He asked me if/whether I had been to Beijing. 他问我是否去过北京。
2．否定的一般疑问句和选择问句
如果直接引语为否定的一般问句或选择疑问句时，用whether…or 连接。
She said, Don't you know my telephone number 她说：你难道不知道我的电话号码吗？
→ She asked me whether I knew her telephone number or not. 她问我是知道她的电话号码。
Do you like this one or that one Tom asked. 汤姆问：你是喜欢这个还是那个？
→ Tom asked me whether I liked this one or that one. 汤姆问我是喜欢这个还是那个。
3．特殊疑问句
间接引语为特殊疑问句时，间接引语前仍然用特殊疑问词作为连词引导宾语从句，注意从句
必须用陈述语序，主句谓语动词常用ask。
He asked, How do you like it 他问：你觉得怎样？
→ He asked me how I liked it. 他问我觉得它怎样。
She asked me, What's the matter with you 她问我：你怎么啦？
→ She asked me what was the matter with me. 她问我我怎么啦。
How many books do you have she asked. 她问：你有多少本书？
→ She asked me how many books I had. 她问我有多少本。
4. 其它
英语中有些疑问句并非提出疑问，而是表示请求、劝告、建议等。这种疑问句变为间接引语
时，往往采用其他的形式。
①．suggest doing
Shall we all go to the film tonight said Michael. 迈克尔说：我们今晚都去看电影，好吗？
→ Michael suggested going to the film tonight. 迈克尔建议今晚都去看电影。
What about having a drink he asked. 他问：喝杯怎么样？
He suggested having a drink. 他建议喝一杯。
②．advise sb to do
Why don't you go hiking asked James. 詹姆士问：你为什么不徒步旅行？
James advised me to go hiking. 詹姆士建议我去徒步旅行。
③. offer to do
He said, Would you like me to post the letter 他说：你要我寄信吗？
He offered to post the letter. 他主动提出寄信。
④．ask sb to do
Will you please bring your reference book here tomorrow she said to me. 她对我说：劳驾你明
天把你的参考书带来好吗？
→ She asked me to take my reference book there the next day. 她让我第二天把我的参考书带
去。
C． 祈使句的间接引语
1 ．直接引语为祈使句时，间接引语往往用复合宾来表示，其结构为主语+谓语+宾语+宾语补
1
足语（动词不定式）。引述动词可根据口气选用tell, ask, order, command, request
等词，句中
please 去掉。
She said to me, Please have a rest. 她对我说：请休息一下。
→ She asked me to have a rest. 她要求我休息一下。
Don't all answer at once, she said to the pupils.
她对学生说：大家不要齐声回答。→ She told
the pupils not to answer all at once. 她叫学生不要齐声回答。
2 ．带有let 的祈使句（表示请求，建议或命令），可用suggest + -ing 形式或suggest +that 从
句来表示其相应的意思。
Let's go for a walk, said the girl. 那姑娘说，让我们去散散步吧。
→ The girl suggested going for a walk. 这女孩建议去散散步。
The teacher said, Let Lily tidy the classroom. 老师说：让莉莉整理教室。
→ The teacher suggested that Lily should tidy the classroom. 老师建议让莉莉整理教室。
D． 感叹句的间接引语
1 ．直接引语是感叹句变为间接引语时，多采用宾语从句结构，既可用what 或how 引导，也
可用that 引导。
What a clever boy you are! my teacher said to him. 老师对他说，你是个聪明的孩子啊！
→ My teacher told him what a clever boy he was. 老师对他说他是一个多聪明的孩子啊。
→ My teacher told him that he was a very clever boy. 老师说他是一个非常聪明的孩子。
He said, How well you look! 他说：你看起来气色多好啊！
→ He said how well I looked. 他说我看起来是气色多好啊。
→ He said that I looked very well. 他说我看起来气色很好。
2 ．有些感叹句可以根据原句的意思，采用适当的动词变为陈述句，不需用间接宾语来转述。
Help! he cried. 他喊到：救命啊！
→ He called for help. 他大声呼救。
What terrible weather it is! he said. 他说：多么糟糕的天气！
→ He complained about the terrible weather. 他抱怨这糟糕的天气。
Happy Christmas! he said. 他说：圣诞快乐！
He wished me a happy Christmas. 他祝我圣诞快乐。
二、 间接引语中的词语变化
直接引语变为间接引语时，间接引语中的动词时态、人称代词、物主代词、指示代词、时间
和地点状语以及主谓语词序往往要作相应的变化。
A． 时态的变化
1 ．时态的变化
①现在时间推移到过去时间
直接引语中的时态
1
一般现在时
现在完成时
现在进行时
现在完成进行时
间接引语中的时态
一般过去时
过去完成时
过去进行时
过去完成进行时
The old man said, I have lived in this street since 1960.
→The old man said that he had lived in that street since 1960. 那老人说他自从196 年起就住
在那条街上了。
He said, Is it raining
→ He asked if it was raining. 他问是不是正在下雨。
②过去时间推移到过去的过去
直接引语中的时态
一般过去时
过去完成时
过去进行时
间接引语中的时态
过去完成时
过去完成时（不变）
过去完成进行时或不变
She said to me, I wrote a letter to my parents three days ago.
→She told me that she had written a letter to her parents three days before.她告诉我她三天前
已给她母亲写了一封信。
What were you doing at seven p.m. yesterday he asked
→ He asked me what I was doing at seven p.m. the day before. 他问我前一天晚上七点在干什
么。
③将来时间推移到过去将来时间
直接引语中的时态
一般将来时
Is/am/are going to do
Is/am/are to do
间接引语中的时态
过去将来时
Was/were going to do
Was/were to do
He said, We shall get ready by eight o'clock.
→He said that they could get ready by eight o'clock. 他说他们将在8 点前准备好。
We are to meet at the school gate, she said to me.
→ She told me that they were to meet at the school gate. 她告诉我他们约定在校门口见面。
1
④间接引语中保持原来时态不变
在下列情况下，间接引语中的谓语动词时态可以保持不变。
a. 主句为现在时或将来时，间接引语的时态保持不变。
He thinks, She will be back in a month.
→ He thinks she will be back in a month. 他想她将在一个月后回来。
He says, I have accepted her invitation.
He says he has accepted her invitation. 他说他已接受了她的邀请。
比较：
间接引语中的谓语动词时态对比。
Sarah said to me, I have two brothers. 莎莎对我说：“我有两个弟弟。”
Sarah told me that she has two brothers.
莎莎告诉我说她有两个弟弟。（说话才认为这情况
是真实的）
Sarah told me that she had two brothers.
莎拉告诉我说她有两个弟弟。（说话者对此没有什
么把握）
b. 间接引语表示的是现在的习惯动作、科学真理、客观事实、格言等。
The geography teacher said to the students, The earth moves round the sun.
→ The geography teacher told the students that the earth moves round the sun.
老师告诉学
生地球围绕太阳转。
He said, Every dog has his day.
→ He said that every dog has his day. 他说是人皆有出头日。
c. 间接引语中动词表示的动作说话时仍在进行或状态仍然存在，时态可保持不变。
He said, The window is broken.
→ He said that the window is broken.他说玻璃窗碎了。
Just now Brown said, My son is ill today.
→ Brown told me just now that his son is ill today. 布朗刚才告诉我说，他儿子今天病了。
d. 间接引语中有明确的过去时间状语，仍可用一般过去时，不必改为过去完成时。
The girl said, I was born in 1978.
→ The girl said that she was born in 1978.那女孩说她生于1978 年。
She said, My teacher was busy yesterday.
→ She said that her teacher was busy yesterday. 她说她老师昨天很忙。
2．情态动词的变化
情态动词在间接引语中都可以改为过去式，must 表示必、推测、禁止等意思时，可不变；表
示必须时可不变，也可用had to 或would have to。
The senior said, All men must die.
→ The senior said that all men must die. 那老者说人总是要死的。
She said, I must go to see the doctor tomorrow afternoon.
→ She said she must/would have to go to see the doctor the next afternoon.
她说第二天下午
她一定得去看医生。
He said to me, We used to go there every year.
→ He told me that they used to come here every year. 他对我说他们过去每年都来这里。
（used
to 在间接引语中不变）
1
B． 代词的变化
1．人称代词的变化
①当主句的主语是第一人称时，引语中的人称代词不变。
I said, You did quite well in the exam yesterday.
→ I said that you had done quite well in the exam the day before.我说你那天考得不错。
②直接引语中主语是第一人称时，在改为间接引语时，其人称与主句中的主语的人称一致。
He said to Tom, I'll do my best to catch up with others.
→ He told Tom that he would do his best to catch up with others. 他告诉汤姆他将尽他所能
赶上其他人。
③直接引语中主语是第二人称时，在改为间接引语时，其人称和主句的宾语相一致。
He said to her, Where did you put the glasses
→ He asked her where she had put the glasses. 他问她，她把杯子放哪儿了。
提示：
如果主句中无宾语，应根据语境或想象，自添适当的宾语；如果直接引语中有呼语，则将其
改为间接引语的宾语。
Mother asked, Where have you been
→ Mother asked me where I had been. 母亲问我去哪儿了。
Why are you late again, John the teacher asked.
→ The teacher asked John why he was late again. 老师问约翰为什么他又迟到。
④直接引语中主语是第三人称时，在改为间接引语时不发生变化。
He said to Tom, She can help them.
→ He told Tom that she could help them. 他告诉汤姆她能够帮助他们。
2．物主代词的变化
You should not overlook your fault, Mum said to me.
→ Mum told me that I should not overlook my fault. 妈妈对我说我不应该忽略我的缺点。
The two boys said, We have lost our dog.
→ The two boys said they had lost their dog. 这两个男孩说他们的狗丢了。
3．指示代词的变化
直接引语中的指示代词
this
these
间接引语中的指示代词
that
those
She said, This is the house in which Lu Xun once lived.
→ She said that that was the house in which Lu Xun had once lived. 她说那是鲁迅曾经住过
的房子。
I bought these flowers for you, Jane said.
Jane said that she had bought those flowers for me. 简说那些花是她为我买的。
I grow these tomatoes myself, he said.
→ He aid that he grew those tomatoes himself. 他说那些胡萝卜是他自己种的。
1
C． 时间和地点状语的变化
1 ．时间状语的变化
He said, I spoke to them yesterday.
→ He said that h had spoken to them the day before. 他说他前一天跟他们讲过话了。
The student said, We have learned about 3,000 English words so far.
→ The student said that they had learned about 3,000 English words by then. 那学生说到那
时为止他们已学会了3,000 个英语单词。
2．地点状语的变化
当直接引语变间引语时，地点状语here 通常变为there。但如果说话人所在地点就是引述人
所在地点，那么仍然使用here.
Come here, please, he said.
→ He asked me to come here. 他叫我到这里来。（引述人地点不变）
→ He asked me to go there. 他叫我到那里去。（引述人地点发生变化）
Here she burst out into a flood of tears, he said to me.
→ He told me that she had burst out into a flood of tears there. 他告诉我说，谈到那个地方她
就放声大哭了起来。
1
第十三章 倒 装
英语的基本语序是“主语+谓语”，如果将谓语的一部分或全部放在主语之前，这种语序叫
倒装。倒装既是一种语法手段，也是一种修辞手段，用于表示一定的句子结构或强调某一句子
成分。
一． 倒装的原因
A． 语法倒装
由于语法结构的需要，将谓语的全部或一部分移到主语之前。
1． 一般疑问句
当我们把一个肯定句转变为疑问句时，常把肯定句中的助动词或情态动词放在句首。这类助
动词或情态动词包括：be， have， can， do， shall， will， may， must， dare， need，
ought 或 used 等。
He will do it.
——Will he do it 他会做这件事吗？
This is my mobile phone number.
——Is this your mobile phone number？ 这是你的手机号码吗？
提示：
如果肯定句中没有助动词或情态动词时， 我们可以在句首用do 的某种形式，以构成倒装语
序。
Jack likes to eat fish. 杰克喜欢吃鱼。
——Does Jack like to eat fish 杰克喜欢吃鱼吗？
2 ． 特殊疑问句
特殊疑问句的构成：特殊疑问词 + 一般疑问句
What does he like to eat 他喜欢吃什么？
1
When will they go to the Great Wall 他们什么时候去长城？
Where did you go last night 昨晚你去哪里了？
提示：如果疑问代词在句中做主语，句子不要倒装。
Who is not coming to dinner tonight 今晚谁不来吃饭？
3. 反意问句
在反意问句中，用一般疑问句的形式，前后两分句的主语，人称要一致。前一分句是肯定，
反意问句用否定形式，并一定要缩写；前一分句是否定, 反意问句用肯定形式。
Everything is ready, isn't it 一切都准备好了，是吗？
Bobbie seldom got drunk, did he 博比很少喝醉，是吗？
You had a wonderful time last night, didn't you 昨天晚上你玩得很愉快，是吗？
4．感叹句
英语中的感叹句有时也通过倒装的形式来表达。
Here comes Santa Clause! 圣诞老人来啦！（谓语前置）
What bad manners they have!
他们真没礼貌！（宾语前置）
How happy the children are ！孩子们多么幸福啊！（表语前置）
5. 某些含有“really”意义的简短表达，也用倒装语序，但它们并不需要任何回答。
--- Elsa saw a snake last night. 埃尔莎昨天晚上看到一条蛇。
--- Did she 真的吗？
--- Our new boss is very easygoing. 我们的新老板人很随和。
--- Is he 是吗？
--- Philip has already finished his report. 菲利普已经完成了他的报告。
--- Has he 真的吗？
6 ．以引导词there 引起的陈述句
There was nobody in the room. 房间里没有人。
In the valley there lies a river. 山谷里有一条河。
There is no harm in trying. 不妨一试。
7 ．虚拟条件句
①在虚拟语气中，如果不用if，且从句中有were, had, should 等助动词，需将助动词were, had,
should 放在句首，用倒装语序。
If I were a bird, I could fly freely.
——Were I a bird, I could fly freely. 假如我是一只小鸟，我就能自由翱翔。
If I had known it earlier, I would have lent him the money.
——Had I known it earlier, I wouldn 誸 have lent him the money. 要是我早知道这件事，我
就不会把钱借给他了．
②表示祝愿的一些句子
Long live peace! 和平万岁！
May our friendship be ever lasting! 愿我们的友谊长存！
8．直接引语的一部分或全部放在句首时
1
You should have been here five minutes ago,said the teacher.
老师说：“你5 分钟之前就该来
了。”
Douglas,said the teacher, do be careful next time. “道格拉斯，”老师说道，“下次一定要小心。”
B. 修辞倒装
为了突出重要的内容，或为了生动地描写动作，人们往往采用修辞倒装。
1 ．为了强调
Never before have we seen such a sight. 以前我们从来没有见过这样的情景。
Only in this way can we learn English well. 只有用这种方法，我们才能学好英语。
Selfish does our life make us students. 是生活把我们的学生变得如此自私。
2．为了生动流畅
Up went the rocket into the sky. 嗖的一声火箭上了天。
Before us lay a lot of difficulties. 我们面前有很多困难。
Happy are those who are contented. 知足者常乐。
Next came a man in his forties. 接下去进来一个四十多岁的男人。
Long did we wait before hearing from her. 我们等了很久才收到她的信。
C. 一些句型的固定用法
Such were his last words. 他最后的话就是这样。
Hardly had I got home when the telephone rang. 我一到家，电话就响了。
How came it that she knew the secret 她怎么会知道那个秘密的？
二． 倒装的种类
英语最基本的词序是主语在谓语动词的前面。如果将句子的主语和谓语完全颠倒过来，这
称之为完全倒装。如果只将助动词或情态动词移至主语之前，谓语的其他部分仍保留在主语的
后面，这称之为部分倒装。
A. 完全倒装
完全倒装是将谓语的全部放在主语之前，此结构通常只用于一般现在时和一般过去时两种。
On her left sat her husband. 她左边坐着她丈夫。
Here is the book you want. 你要的书在这儿。
Down went the small boat. 小船沉下去了。
B. 部分倒装
部分倒装是指将谓语的一部分，如助动词或情态动词，移至主语之前。
Only by working hard can one succeed. 只有努力才能成功。
Never have I seen her before. 我以前没见过她。
提示：如果句中的谓语没有助动词或情态动词，则需添加助动词do, does 或did，并将其置
于主语之前。
Well do I remember the day I joined the League. 入团的那一天，我记忆犹新。
Little did I think that he could be back alive 我没有想到他竟能活着回来。
1
二． 常见的倒装结构
A. 常见的完全倒装结构
1．there be 句型。
There is a mobile phone and some books on the desk. 桌上有一个手机和一些书。
There are thousands of people gathering on the square. 广场上聚集着成千上万的人
注意 引导词there 还可以接appear, exist, lie, remain, seem, stand, live 等词。
There lived an old fisherman in the village. 村里住着一位老渔夫。
There stand two white houses by the river. 河滨矗立着两座白房子。
There existed some doubt among the students. 学生中有些怀疑。
2 ．用于here, there, now, thus, then + 动词 + 主语的句型中（谓语动词多为be, go, come 等）。
Here comes the bus ．汽车来了。
There goes the bell. 铃响了。
Now comes my turn. 轮到我了。
Then came the order to take off. 起飞的命令到了。
3．以out, in, up, down, off, away
等副词开头，谓语动词是表示“移动”的go, come, leave
等句子里。
Away went the crowd one by one.
人们一个一个地离去。
In came a stranger in black. 进来了一位穿黑衣的陌生人。
Down fell the leaves. 树叶掉了下来。
注意在完全倒装的结构里,如果主语是人称代词,则用正常语序。
Out she went. 她走了。
Here we are. 我们到了。
4．表示地点的介词词组位于句首，谓语动词是表示“存在”之意的be, lie, stand, exist 等句
子中。
South of the lake lies a big supermarket. 湖泊的南边是一个大超市。
20 miles east of our school lies a modern swimming pool. 我们学校向东20 英里有一个现代化
的游泳池。
On the floor were piles of old books, magazines and newspapers.
地板上是一堆堆旧的书报杂
志。
5. “表语+连系动词+主语”结构。
Lucky is she who was admitted to a famous university last year.
她很幸运，去年被一所名牌大学录取。
Gone are the days when he was looked down upon.
他被人看不起的日子一去不复返了。
Present at the meeting are some well-known scientists.
一些知名的科学家出席了会议。
B. 常见的部分倒装结构
1
1. 含有否定意义的副词或连词（如not, seldom, little, hardly, never, rarely, nowhere 等）放在
句首时。
He can not speak a single word of English.
——Not a single word of English can he speak. 他连一个英语单词都不会说。
He cares little about his clothes.
——Little does he care about his clothes. 他不在乎穿着。
I have never seen him before.
——Never have I seen him before.
——Never before have I seen him. 我以前没见过他。
The mother didn't leave the room until the child fell asleep.
——Not until the child fell asleep did the mother leave the room. 孩子睡着了，妈妈才离开房
间。(Not until 引出的主从复合句中，主句倒装，从句不倒装。)
Churchill was not only a statesman, but a poet
——Not only was Churchill a statesman, but a poet. 丘吉尔不仅是个政治家，而且还是个诗
人。
I shall by no means give up.
——By no means shall I give up. 我决不放弃。
必背：表示“刚……就……的倒装结构
Hardly had he started to leave when it began to rain. 他刚要离开，天就下起了雨。
Scarcely had he sat down when his mobile phone rang. 他刚坐下，手机就响了。
No sooner had he handed in his paper than he realized his mistakes.
他刚交卷就意识到出错
了。
2. 副词only +状语放在句首时。
Only then did I see life was not easy. 只有那时我才知道生活是不易的。
Only in this way can you use the computer well. 只有用这种方法你才能把电脑学好。
Only when he is seriously ill does he ever stay in bed.
只有他病重时，他才待在床上。（only+
状语从句，从句不倒装，主句倒装）
3. so 作“也”讲时，引导的句子用倒装语序，表示前面所说的肯定情况也适用于另一人(或物)。
其句型是：So + be（have，助动词或情态动词）+主语。
She has been to Tokyo. So have I. 她去过东京，我也去过。
He can send emails to his former classmates. So can she.
他能电子邮件给以前的同学，她也
能。
He went to the film last night. So did I. 昨天晚上他去看电影了，我也去了。
注意：如果对前面所说的内容，加以肯定，或不作“也”讲而只起连词作用，表示一种结果
的意思，那不倒装。
--- Jack won the first prize in the contest. 杰克在比赛中获一等奖。
--- So he did. 确实是的。
--- It is cold today. 今天很冷。
--- So it is and so was it yesterday. 确实是很冷，昨天也很冷。
His mother told him to go to the film. So he did. 他母亲叫他去看电影，他就去了。
1
4 ．neithernor 引导的句子用倒装语序，用于对前面所说的否定内容表示同样的看法。
She won 誸 go. NeitherNor will I. 她不走，我也不。
I cannot swim. Neither can he . 我不会游泳，他也不会。
注意：如果前面所说的内容既有肯定又有否定，或前后的谓语动词形式不一致时，用“It is the
same with +主语”结构或用“So it is with +主语”结构。
He worked hard, but didn't pass the exam. So it was with his sister. 他很努力，但没有通过考
试。他妹妹也是这样。（既有肯定又有否定）
She is a teacher and she enjoys teaching. So it is with Mr Li.
她是老师，热爱教书。李先生也
是这样。（谓语一个是系动词，一个是行为动词）
5. “so...that...和“such...that...”结构中的so 或such 位于句首时。
He was so excited that he could not say a word.
——So excited was he that he could not say a word. 他如此激动以至于一句话都说不出来。
His anger was such that he lost control of himself.
——Such was his anger that he lost control of himself. 他是如此地生气，以至于他不能控制
自己了。
6 ．一些表示频率的副词（如many a time, often 等）位于句首时。
I have seen her taking a walk alone many a time.
Many a time have I seen her taking a walk alone. 我多次看到她独自一人在散步。
She often came to my house in the past.
Often did she come to my house in the past. 过去她常到我家来。
7 ．表示方式、程度的副词位于句首时。
Well do I remember the day when I joined the League. 我对入团的那一天还记忆犹新。
Gladly would I accept your proposal. 我很高兴接受你的建议。
8 ．非谓语动词 + be + 主语。
Covering much of the earth's surface is a blanket of water. 覆盖地球大部分表面的是水。
Also discussed were the problems we had met with in our studies.
同时还讨论了我们在学习
中碰到的问题。
First to unfold was the map of the world. 首先要打开的是世界地图。
B． 常见的其他形式的倒装结构
1 ．宾语位于句首表示强调
The past one can know, but the future one can only feel. 一个人可以明知过去，但只能感悟未
来。
What Julia did I cannot imagine. 我想象不出朱莉娅做了什么。
2．the ...more... the more ...结构中的倒装
The harder you work, the happier you feel. 你越努力工作，就越觉得快乐。（表语提前）
The more you study, the more you know. 你学得越多，就明白越多。（宾语提前）
提示：
1
有时从句倒装，主句不倒装。
I like the painting better the more I look at it. 我越看这幅画，就越喜欢它。
3．asthough 引导的让步状语从句中的倒装
①表语提前，构成倒装。
Though she is very pretty, she is not clever.
→ Pretty though she is, she is not clever．虽然她很漂亮，但是她不聪明。
Although it may appear strange, it is true.
→ Disabled as he was, he tried his best to serve the people. 虽然他残疾了，但他仍尽力为人
民服务。
Although he is a child, he speaks fluent English.
→ Child as he is, he speaks fluent English. 虽然他是个孩子，但能讲流利的英语。 （名词单
数前不用不定冠词a）
Though he is the shortest, he is the richest of the three.
→ Shortest as he is, he is the richest of the three. 虽然他是三个人中最矮的，却是最富有的。
（形容词最高级前去定冠词the）
②动词提前，构成倒装。
Though they searched, they could not find anything in the house.
→ Search as they did , they could not find anything in the house. 虽然他们搜遍了， 却没在
房子里找到任何东西。
Though I failed, I would try again.
→ Fail as I did, I would try again. 尽管我失败了，但我还要再试。
Though she may try again, she won't pass it.
Try as she may, she won't pass it. 尽管愿意再试，她还是不会通过的。
③副词提前，构成倒装。
Though he tried hard, he couldn't pass the exam.
→ Hard as he tried, he couldn't pass the exam. 尽管他努力了，他还没有通过考试。
Though I listened attentively, I still couldn't understand what he said at the meeting.
→ Attentively as I listened, I still couldn't understand what he said at the meeting. 尽管我专
心听了，我还是不懂他在会议上说的话。
Though he ran the fastest, he still didn'tcatch the train.
→ Fastest as he ran, he still didn't catch the train. 尽管他跑得最快，仍没有赶上火车。（副词
最高级前不用定冠词the）
4．一些习惯说法使用倒装语序。
How goes it with you 你好吗？
What care I 管我什么事？
What matters it 这有什么关系？
口诀
副词开头要倒装，人称代词则如常。
only 修饰副介状，位于句首半倒装。
否定意义副连词，即“不……也不”需倒装。
such 代词做表语，引起主谓要倒装。
Not only 开头句，前一分句须倒装。
1
had, were, should 虚拟句，省略if 半倒装。
第十四章 强 调
强调是有效地进行思想交流的重要手段之一。人们在交际过程中，为了使自己的思想能为
听者或读者恰当的理解，必须突出重要的内容，这就需要运用强调的手段。
一、 强调手段
在现代英语中，人们可以通过语音手段、词汇手段、语法手段来进行强调。
A. 语音手段
在口语中，人们可以根据交流的需要，通过语句重音来对不同的词语进行强调。例如 She
speaks English well 这句话，可以通过语句重音来分别对不同的词进行强调。
A Shall we ask Jennifer or Robin to host the English evening party
B Of course Jennifer. She speaks English well. ( 重读She，强调“她”)
A Jennifer's been living in Australia for two years.
B She speaks English well but her writing is not very good. ( 重读speaks，强调“说”)
A Jennifer speaks French beautifully.
B She speaks English well, too. ( 重读English，强调“英语”)
A Do you think Jennifer is fit for the job
B Certainly. She speaks English well. ( 重读well，强调“好”)
B. 词汇手段
人们常用一些形容词、副词、否定词等词汇手段来加强语气。
1．形容词very 放在the, this, that 或代词所有格my, his 等后面, 强调后边所修饰的名词。
You are the very person I want to chat with. 你就是我要聊天的那个人。
He is the very picture of his father. 他活像他父亲。
1
At that very moment the policemen came. 就在那时警察到了。
2．副词just 放在the, this, that 或代词所有格my, his 等前面，强调the, this, that，my, his
所修饰的名词。
This is just the book I am looking for. 这就是我在寻找的书。
He is just the right person for the job. 他就是适合做这份工作的人。
3．用whatever, whenever, wherever 等分别加强what, when, where 等词的语气。
What is left over is yours. 剩下来的是你的。
-- Whatever is left over is yours. 剩下来所有的都是你的。
When did you find time to do it 你什么时候有空做这事？
-- Whenever did you find time to do it 你究竟什么时候有空做这事？
Where are you going 你到哪里去？
-- Wherever are you going 你究竟到哪里去？
Who can that be 那会是谁呢？
Whoever can that be 那究竟会是谁呢？
4 ．副词possibly 用于否定句或疑问句情态动词cancould 后，加强否定或疑问的语气，有“无
论如何, 不管怎样”的意思。
We cannot do it. 那件事我们不能做。
-- We cannot possibly do it. 那件事我们无论如何也不能做。
He can't forget it. 他不会忘记此事。
-- He can't possibly forget it. 他无论如何也不会忘记此事。
Could he agree 他会同意吗？
Could he possibly agree 难道他会同意吗？
5．副词simply 用于加强语气，表示“真正，的确，非常，简直，完全”等意思。
It is beautiful. 这很美。
-- It is simply beautiful. 这的确是美。
I can't go such stupid behavior. 我不能接受如此愚蠢的行为。
I simply can't go such stupid behavior. 对这种愚蠢的行为我实在忍受不了。
6．副词out, up, over 等加强语气。
①副词out 放在介词短语的前面, 指“较远”的地方，如郊区或远方农村等。
I am living in the country. 我住在乡下。
-- I am living out in the country. 我住在乡下。
We will sail to the island. 我们将出海前往该岛。
--We will sail out to the island. 我们将出海远航，前往该岛。
②副词up 经常与go ,run, walk, come 等动词连用，由远及近地“从某处来”，“到某处去”。
A stranger came to me and asked the way. 一个陌生人向我走来问路。
-- A stranger came up to me and asked the way. 一个陌生人走到我跟前来问路。
Please bring the things to my office. 请把这些东西拿到我办公室来。
-- Please bring the things up to my office. 请把这些东西拿到我办公室来。
③副词over 经常与go, run, walk, come 等动词连用，强调跨越一段距离。
1
I will go to his office and have a talk with him. 我要去他办公室和他谈谈。
I will go over to his office and have a talk with him. 我要去他办公室和他谈谈。
7. 将on earth, in the world, in heaven, under the sun 等短语放在what, when, which, who,
where, how 等词的后面，加强语气。
When did you send the email to him ？你什么时候发的电子邮件给他？
-- When on earth did you send the email to him ？你究竟是什么时候发电子邮件给他的？
What do you mean by saying so 你这么说是什么意思？
-- What in heaven do you mean by saying so ？你这么说到底是什么意思？
Where could he be 他可能在哪里？
--Where in the world could he be 他究竟在哪里？
8 ．用反身代词表示强调。
You can go there yourself. 你自己可以去那里。
The president himself will chair the meeting. 总统将亲自主持这个会议。
I am a stranger here myself. 我自己在这里也是个陌生人。
9 ．much, far, by far, still, even, a great deal, a lot 放在形容词或副词比较级的前面，用来加强
语气。
This building is much larger than that one. 这幢楼房比那幢楼房大得多。
His composition is far better than mine. 他的作文比我的作文好多了。
That would be a great deal better. 那就更好了。
注意：
by far
要放在最高级或带the 的比较级前，但如果比较级前面无定冠词，by far 放在比较级
前后均可。
He is by far the tallest student in the class. 他是班上最高的学生。
It is by far the longer river of the two. 这是两条河中较长的一条。
This is better by far. 这个要好多了。
10. 用重复某一个单词来表示强调。
It's very, very unkind of you, isn't it 你非常非常不友善，不是吗？
We waited and waited, but nothing happened. 我们等来等去，但什么事也没发生。
I haven't seen him for years and years and years. 我已经好几年没见到他了。
11. 用not a single, not a bit, not simply, by no means 等短语来加强否定的语气。
She's not in the least angry with me. 她一点也不生我的气。
I can't speak a single word of Japanese. 我就连一个日语单词也不会说。
She is by no means diligent. 她根本不勤奋。
比较：
not a bit 一点也不(= not at all)；not a little 非常(= very much)
He was not a bit tired. 他一点不累。
He was not a little tired. 他非常累。
12. 用none 来表示强调。 1
1
This is none of your business. 这与你丝毫没有关系。
He is none of my friends. 他决不是我的朋友。
B. 语法手段
1. 通过改变句子结构或颠倒正常语序的手段来进行强调。
Happy are those who are content. 知足常乐。
Never will China be the first to use nuclear weapons. 中国决不会第一个使用核武器。
Across the river lies a newly-built bridge. 河上有一座新建的桥。
Hero as he is, he still remains modest. 尽管他是英雄，他仍然很谦虚。
2. 用助动词do, does 或did 来强调谓语动词。
Do come early. 一定早点来。
He does know Beijing well. 他的确熟悉北京。
He did tell me about it yesterday. 他昨天的确告诉了我这件事。
3 ．用修辞疑问句表示强调。
疑问句转用作加强语气的陈述句，称之为修辞性疑问句。肯定的修辞疑问句其意义相当于强
调的否定陈述句；而否定的修辞疑问句其意义则相当于强调的肯定陈述句。
Isn't it a modern school 难道这不是一所现代化的学校吗？（= It is really a modern school.）
Can anyone doubt the truth of his statement
谁能怀疑他陈述的真实性？ (= Surely no one
can would doubt it.)
Aren't you ashamed of yourself 难道你不惭愧吗？(= You should be ashamed of yourself.)
Who doesn't know the sun rises in the east
谁不知道太阳从东方升起？(＝Everyone knows
the sun rises in the east.)
一、
it 引导的强调结构
“It is + 被强调部分 + thatwho + 句子其他部分”是使用最广的强调句型。除了谓语动词
不能强调外，句子中其它成分，如主语、状语、宾语或宾语补足语都可以用该句型中加以强调。
A. 用强调结构强调句子成分
1 ．强调主语
被强调的主语是人时，可用It iswas ... thatwho ...，但如果被强调的部分既包括人又包括物，
只能用that。
He bought a camera yesterday.
-- It was he thatwho bought a camera yesterday. 是他昨天买了一架照相机。
The famous writer and his works have aroused great interest among the students.
-- It is the famous writer and his works that have aroused great interest among the students.
在学生中引起极大的兴趣的正是这位著名作家以及他的作品。
注意：
强调“I”时谓语动词的变化形式。
It is I who am to blame.
1
It is me who is to blame. 是我该受到责怪。（非正式文体）
2. 强调宾语
She helped me yesterday.
--It was me thatwhom she helped yesterday. 昨天她帮助的人是我。
They often talk about the school and the teachers.
--It is the school and the teachers that they often talk about. 他们经常谈论的是学校和老师。
3. 强调宾语补足语
We elected him chairman of the meeting.
-- It was chairman of the meeting that we elected him. 我们选他是做会议的主席。
We painted the wall white.
It was white that we painted the wall. 我们把墙漆成的是白色。
4. 强调状语
英语中的状语种类很多,一般都可以用It iswas ... that ...来强调。
①时间状语
He left his hometown for Taiwan in his teens. 他十几岁时就离开家乡去了台湾。
-- It was in his teens that he left his hometown for Taiwan.
他是在十几岁时离开家乡去台湾
的。
He let out the secret after the guest had gone away. 客人走后, 他说出了秘密。
-- It was after the guest had gone away that he let out the secret.
是在客人走后,他才说出了秘
密。
提示
如果强调由not…until till 引导的时间状语时，要注意否定前移。
He didn't return to his hometown until after liberation.
-- It was not until after liberation that he returned to his hometown.
他是解放后才回到他家
乡的。
②频率状语
He comes to see me once in a while.
-- It is once in a while that he comes to see me. 他现在是偶尔来看看我。
③地点状语
The car accident happened in this street yesterday.
-- It was in this street that the car accident happened yesterday.
昨天就是在这条街上发生了
汽车事故。
④方式状语
They took care of their sick mother by turns.
-- It was by turns that they took care of their sick mother. 他们轮流来照看生病的母亲。
⑤目的状语
He got up early to catch the early bus.
--It was to catch the early bus that he got up early. 是为了赶早班车，他才起得很早的。
⑥原因状语
They could not cross the river because the water had risen.
-- It was because the water had risen that they could not cross the river.
正是由于水涨了，他
1
们没有渡过河去。
提示：
在强调结构It iswas ...that ...中，要用because 来引导原因状语从句，不用since 或as。（见第
11 章 状语从句）
⑦其他状语
The tailor made a suit to my own measure.
-- It was to my own measure that the tailor made a suit.
裁缝是按我自己的尺寸做了一套衣
服。
⑧with without 复合结构
“with without+名词代词+其他成分”这种结构，也可以放在It iswas ... that 中，成为被强
调的部分。
He was waiting for his son at the gate, with an umbrella in his hand.
-- It was with an umbrella in his hand that he was waiting for his son at the gate.
他是手里拿
着一把伞在门口等待着他的儿子。
She felt very nervous, with the teacher standing beside her.
It was with the teacher standing beside her that she felt very nervous. 是有老师站在她旁
边，她才感到很紧张的。
B ．强调句与定语从句、状语从句等其他句型的区别
有时强调句在形式上和定语从句、状语从句很相似。我们除了从意思上进行区分外，还能根
据强调句结构特点来进行判断，如能去掉It was ...that ... 后，句子仍然通顺，就是强调句。
It was at the railway station that we first met 16 years ago.
是在火车站我们16 年前第一次相逢。（强调句，强调地点状语at the railway station）
It was the railway station where we first met 16 years ago.
这是我们16 年前第一次相逢的火车站。（定语从句，where 是关系副词，在定语从句中做地
点状语）
It was in this street that the car accident happened the other day.
前几天发生汽车事故的就是在这条街上。（强调句，强调地点状语in this street）
It was this street where the car accident happened the other day.
这是前几天汽车事故的那条街。（定语从句，where 是关系副词在定语从句中做地点状语）
It was at midnight that he got home yesterday.
他昨天是半夜到家的。（强调句，强调时间状语at midnight）
It was midnight when he got home yesterday.
昨天他到家时已是半夜。（when 引导的是时间状语从句，it 是代词，指时间）
C. 强调句的一般疑问句和特殊疑问句
1. 强调句的一般疑问句基本句型是：IsWas + it + that +句子其他成分？
Did he see you in the office just now ？
-- Was it in the office that he saw you just now ？他见你的地方是在办公室吗？
Does he often go to the library
Is it to the library that he often goes 他经常去的地方是图书馆吗？
1
2. 强调句的特殊疑问句的基本句型是：特殊疑问词+ iswas + it + that + 句子其他成分
When did you first go to the Great Wall ？
-- When was it that you first went to the Great Wall ？你究竟什么时候第一次去长城的？
Where did you go last night
-- Who was it that told you about it 究竟是谁告诉你这件事的？
Why did you keep silent at the meeting ？
Why was it that you kept silent at the meeting？你究竟为什么在会上保持缄默？
3. 含有情态动词强调句的疑问句结构：
① 一般疑问句基本句型是：情态动词或助动词+it+be+被强调的部分+that+句子其他成分？
Could he be killed at home 他是在家被杀的吗？
--Could it be at home that he was killed 他被杀的地方会是在家里吗？
Might she leave her keys in the office 也许她把钥匙丢在办公室了
--Might ti be in the office that she left her keys ？ 也许她把钥匙丢在办公室了
②特殊疑问句基本句型是：特殊疑问词+情态动词或助动词+it+be+that+主语+句子其他成分
Where might the accident happen ？
-- Where might it be that the accident happened ？可能是在什么地方发生这个事故的？
Who can it be in the office now ？
-- Who can it be that is in the office now ？现在还在办公室里的会是谁呢？
二、
what 引导的强调结构
用“what 从句 + be + 被强调成分”或“被强调成分 + be + what 从句”表示强调。
John wants a good rest. 约翰想要好好休息一下。
--What John wants is a good rest. 约翰想要的是好好休息一下。
或： A good rest is what John wants. 好好休息一下正是约翰想要的事。（比较少见）
I'd like you to work on Exercise Two on Page 38. 我要你们做38 页上的练习二。
-- What I'd like you to work on is Exercise Two on Page 38. 我要你们做的作业是38 页上的练
习二。
I need two books. 我要两本书。
-- What I need are two books. 我要的是两本书。（注意谓语动词的数）
注意：
在这种强调句型中，除了what 外，人们很少使用其他连词。
避免说：Where you should play football is the play ground, not the classroom.
最好说：The place where you should play football is the playground, not the classroom. 你们
踢足球的地方是操场，而不是教室。
避免说：When I read English aloud is early morning.
最好说：The time I read English aloud is early morning. 我是在清晨朗读英语。
避免说：Why she was absent from class was that she was feeling unwell.
最好说：The reason why she was absent from class was that she was feeling unwell. 她缺课的
原因是她身体不好。
1
第十五章 省略
莎士比亚曾经说过：Brevity is the soul of wit. （言以简为贵）。为了使话说得简明扼要，
英语句子中某个单词、短语甚至从句或主句都可以省去。这种省去句子某些成分而保持句
子意思不变的现象，称为省略（ellipsis）。
一、 省略的目的
省略多见于非正式的文体，尤其在对话中，省略是一种十分普遍的现象。英语中的省略
一般说来有三个目的：
A． 避免重复，减少累赘。
省略的主要目的是避免重复，去掉不必要的累赘和繁琐。
Mike said that he would come to school to see me the next day, but he didn't come to
school to see me the next day. 迈克说他第二 天要来学校看我，但是第二天他并没有来学校
看我。
-- Mike said that he would come to school to see me the next day, but he didn't.
迈克说他
第二天要来学校看我，但是他并没有来。(省掉最后九个词，句子简洁多了)
— What did he want yesterday 他昨天要了什么？
— An apple. 一个苹果。（如果回答时说出全文“He wanted an apple yesterday”，便显
得别扭，不自然）
B． 连接紧密，结构紧凑。
1
省略也是使上下文紧密连接的一种修辞手段。
John was the winner in 1994 and Bob in 1998.
约翰是1994 年的获胜者，鲍勃是1998 年
的获胜者。（Bob 后省略了was the winner，句子结构显得比较紧凑）
In some places we stopped in tents for the night, in other places in caves.
我们在有些地方
住在帐篷里过夜，在有些地方住在山洞里。
（in other places 后省略了主语和谓语we stopped
for the night，上下文连接更加紧密）
省略：
回答问题要简洁，并列重复需省略。祈使主语常省略，比较than 后需省略。宾从表从that
勿省略。前后出现同一词，习惯表达需省略。
C．强调重点，突出信息。
省略的另一作用是突出新的信息。
Truth speaks too low, hypocrisy too loud. 真理讲话声太低，虚伪讲话声太高。（后一分句
省略谓语speaks，突出了too loud）
— Have you told him that 你把那告诉他了吗？
— Not yet. 还没有呢。(= I have not told him that yet. 强调not yet )
二、 可省略的成分
省略大致可归纳为功能词的省略和语法结构上的省略两种。在很多情况下，这两种省略
存在着交叉的关系，即有时既是功能词的省略，同时又是语法结构上的省略。
A． 功能词的省略
功能词指的是没有完整意义，但有语法意义的词，如冠词、介词、助动词等。英语句子
结构的简洁，首先表现在功能词的省略上。
1．冠词的省略
They elected John (the) monitor of the class. 他们选约翰当班长。
A man and (a) woman are talking in the office. 办公室一男一女正在谈话。
He could not understand why there was no noise coming from the house, not even the
sound of the radio or (the) television. 他不明白为什么从屋子里一点响声也没传出来，甚至
连收音机和电视机的声音也没有。
提示：
在英语新闻标题、告示中，经常省略冠词。
Chinese President Stresses Role of Working Class
中国国家主席强调工人阶级作用 （新
闻标题 = The Chinese President Stresses the Role of the Working Class）
People Rebuild Homes After Flood
洪水退后人民重建家园（新闻标题 = The People
Rebuild Their Homes After the Flood）
DO NOT SPEAK TO DRIVER WHILE BUS IS IN MOTION
汽车在行驶时请勿和司机
讲话。（告示 = Do not speak to the driver while the bus is in motion）
2．代词的省略
I went to the market, (I) bought something useful, and (I) returned home within an hour.
1
我去了市场，买了点有用的东西，一小时之内就回来了。
They didn't like it, yet (they) said nothing. 他们并不喜欢它，可是什么话也没说。
(It) Doesn't matter. 这不碍事。
(You) Had a good time, didn't you 玩得开心，是吧？
I like your two small bottles, but I don't like the smallest (one).
我喜欢你的两只小瓶子，
但我不喜欢最小的那一只。
3．连词的省略
We are delighted (that) you can come. 你能来，我们很高兴。
I believe (that) you will succeed ．我相信你们会成功的。
It's a pity (that) he's leaving. 他要走，真遗憾。
4 ．关系词的省略
I'll give you all (that) I have. 我要把我所有的一切都给你。
He read the book (which) I got yesterday. 他看过我昨天买的书了。
It wasn't I (who) let him in. 不是我放他进来的。
It happened on the day (when) we first met. 这发生在我们初次见面的那一天。
There is a man (who) wants to see you. 有个人想要见你。
5 ．助动词的省略
(Does) Anyone want a drink 有谁要喝一杯吗？
Who (do) you think you are
你以为你是谁？（在特殊疑问句中，当主语是第二人称时，
助动词do 可省略）
I (have) got to go now. 我得走了。
6 ．不定式符号的省略
I hope to finish my job and (to) go back home.
我希望做完事回家。（当几个不定式并列
时，一般只需在第一个不定式前用to）
What we could do was (to) get away.
（主语从句中含有do，那么作表语的动词不定式往
往省略to）
We did not dare (to) speak. 我们不敢说话。（dare 作行为动词用时，否定式可省略to）
There is nothing to do but (to) obey the orders. 除了服从命令之外，我们别无他法。（介词
but 前如有do，but 后可省略to）
注意：
当两个并列的不定式在意义上表示对比关系时，后面的不定式一般不省略to。
To be or not to be, that is the question. 活着还是死亡，这就是问题所在。（莎士比亚）
It was better to laugh than to cry. 笑比哭好。
7 ．介词的省略
He went (in) that way.
他往那边去了。
The two boys are (of) the same age. 这两个男孩年龄一样大。
I am in doubt (about) whether this is right or not. 我拿不定主意这对不对。
You may come to see me (at) any time between 4 and 5. 你在4点到5点之间随时都可以来
1
见我。
She must have stayed here (for) a long time. 她在这里一定呆了很久了。
必背：
在下列结构中，介词in 常常省略。
be busy (in) doing sth. 忙于做某事
spend time (in) doing sth. 花时间做某事
waste energy (in) doing sth. 浪费精力做某事
have difficulty (in) doing sth. 做某事有困难
have a good time (in) doing sth. 某事做得非常愉快
have a hard time (in) doing sth. 某事做得很艰难
take turns (in) doing sth. 轮流做某事
It is no use (in) doing sth. 做某事没有用
It is no good (in) doing sth. 做某事无益
There is no hurry (in) doing sth. 不必着急做某事
There is no point (in) doing sth. 做某事无意义
There is no use (in) doing sth. 做某事没有用
8 ．引导词there 的省略
(There) Ought to be some coffee in the pot. 壶里应该有些咖啡的。
(There) Must be somebody waiting for you. 肯定有人在等你。
B． 句子成分的省略
为了避免重复，或者为了使某一内容显要注目，可以省略某些句子成分而保持句子原意
不变。
1 ．省略主语
Hope so. 希望如此。（= I hope so.）
Beg your pardon. 请你原谅。（= I beg your pardon.）
Take care! 当心！（= You take care.）
Looks as if it will rain. 看起来像要下雨。（= It looks as if it will rain.）
Serves you right. 你活该！（= It serves you right.）
注意：
祈使句主语通常省略（如Take care! 当心！）。但有时为了明确对方，可加上主语。
You feed the bird today, will you 今天你喂鸟，好吗？
Somebody answer the phone, please. 请来个人接一下电话。
2 ．省略谓语
Anything the matter ？要紧吗？（= Is anything the matter）
Who next 该谁了？（= Who comes next）
Just a moment, please. 请等一会儿。（= Just wait a moment, please.）
The river was deep and the ice thin.
河很深，冰很薄。（= The river was deep and the ice
was thin.）
We'll do the best we can. 我们将尽力而为。（= We'll do the best we can do.）
1
What we can't get seems better than what we have.
我们得不到的似乎要比我们已经得到
的要好。（= What we can't get seems better than what we have got.）
3 ．省略表语
Are you ready Yes, I am. 你准备好了吗？ 我准备好了。（am 后面省略了表语ready）
He is a lover of sports as he was in his youth.
他还是像年轻时那样，是一位运动爱好者。
（was 后面省略了表语a lover of sports）
China has been, and still is, the most populous country in the world.
中国过去是，而且现
在还是世界上人口最多的国家。 （= China has been the most populous country in the world
and still is the most populous country in the world.）
4 ．省略宾语
We have to analyze and solve problems.
我们必须分析问题解决问题。（analyze 后省略了
宾语problems）
I struck match after match, but could not light.
我划了一根又一根火柴，但一根也没划
着。（light 后省略了宾语a match）
Let's do the dishes. I'll wash and you'll dry. 让我们洗碗吧，我来洗，你来揩干。（wash 和
dry 后面省略了宾语dishes）
5 ．省略定语
He spent part of the money, and the rest he saved.
他花了一部分钱，其余的他都存了起
来。（the rest 后面省略了定语of the money）
6 ．省略状语
(Even) The wisest man cannot know everything. 即使最聪明的人也不能无所不知。
Mary spoke (rudely), and John answered rudely. 玛丽说得粗鲁，约翰答得也粗鲁。
He was not hurt. (How) Strange! 他没有受伤，真奇怪！
三、 省略在句子中的运用
在一个句子中，省略可分为依赖上下文省略和不依赖上下文省略两种。前者省略的部分
可在句子中找到，但后者可能找不到。
A． 简单句中的省略
1 ．依赖上下文的省略，在对话中最为常用。
Like more beer 再要点啤酒吗？（= Would you like more beer）
— Would you mind if I used your telephone 用一下你的电话，你介意吗？
— Not at all. 一点也不。（= I do not mind at all.）
— Will he pass this examination 他这次考试会通过吗？
— Probably. 大概会的。（= He will probably pass the examination.）
提示：
被省略的部分一般可以根据上下文在句子中补上，但有时省略结构已经定型，如果把省
略部分补上，反而显得累赘或不合乎习惯。
1
An hour in the morning is worth two in the evening.
一日之计在于晨。（在two 后补上
hours 显得罗嗦。）
It is now ten to seven. 现在七点十分。
（如说It is now ten minutes to seven o'clock. 显得累
赘）
No parking. 禁止停车。（= No parking is allowed here. 告示用语，补上不合乎习惯。）
2 ．不依赖于上下文的省略。
All aboard! 请上船。（=All go aboard. 省略谓语）
What exciting news!
多么令人激动的消息啊！(= What exciting news it is! 省略主语+谓
语)
Sounds like a good idea. 听上去是个好主意。(= It sounds like a good idea. 省略主语)
Everybody appears well prepared.
看起来大家都准备好了。（=Everybody appears to be
well prepared. 省略不定式to be）
B． 并列句中的省略
并列句中如果前后分句有相同的部分，常常可以省略掉，以避免重复。通常被省略的可
以是主语、谓语、谓语动词、宾语或其它成分，或句子成分的一部分。
1 ．省略出现在后一分句。
John likes collecting stamps but (John) hates listening to music. 约翰喜欢集邮但不喜欢听
音乐。（省略主语）
Some books are to be tasted, others (are) to be swallowed, and some few (are) to be
chewed and digested. 有些书是应当尝尝滋味的，有些书是应当吞食下去的，有少数书是应
当咀嚼和消化的。（省略谓语）
I have been to Beijing and (I have) seen the Great Wall.
我到过北京，见到了万里长城。
（省略主语+助动词）
I asked him to see the film, but he didn't want to (see the film). 我请他去看电影，但他不
想去。（省略作宾语的不定式）
注意：
为了避免重复，不定式可以省去与句子前面重复的动词原形，但不定式符号to 必须保留
（详见第5 章）。
—Will you join in the game 你愿意参加这项活动吗？
—I'd be glad to (join in the game). 我很乐意参加。
I didn't want to go there, but I had to (go there). 我不想去那里，但没办法。
2 ．省略出现在前一分句。
We can (win tomorrow's match), and certainly will, win tomorrow's match. 我们能够，而
且一定会在明天的比赛中获胜。（前一分句省略谓语+宾语）
I wished (to find him), yet feared to find him. 我又想找到他，又怕找到他。
3 ．前后两个分句都出现省略。
They can (pay the full fee) and (they) should pay the full fee.
他们能够也应该支付全部费
用。
1
I'll fly to (Guangzhou), but (I'll) drive back from Guangzhou.
我将飞往广州，但开车回
来。
C ．复合句中的省略
在主从复合句中，省略的现象是很普遍的。
1 ．省略主句的句首部分。
(I'm) Sorry I couldn't go. 很抱歉，我不能去。
(Is there) Nothing more you want to say 你没什么要补充吗？
2 ．省略整个主句或主句的一部分（回答问题时常用）。
(It is a ) Pity he's failed. 很遗憾，他失败了。
If he says he'll come, he will (come). 如果他说来，他就一定会来。
What (will happen) if it's raining 如果天下雨怎么办？
— Where is it 那东西在哪里？
—(It is) Where you left it. 就在你放的地方。
— How are you getting on with your English 你的英语学得怎么样？
— (I'm) Not (getting on) so well as I expected.没有我预计的那样好。
— Will you go abroad soon 你很快要出国吗？
— (I'll) Not (go abroad) until I graduate from the college next summer. 要到明年夏天大
学毕业后才走。
3．在一些状语从句中，如果谓语动词是be，主语又和主句的主语一致，或者主语是it，
常常可以把从句中的主语和be 省略掉。
①以when, while, once, until 等连词引导的时间状语从句
When (you are) in Rome do as Rome does. 入国问禁，入乡随俗。
Whenever (it is) possible, you should speak English as much as you can.
在任何可能的时
间，你应多讲英语。（省略的主语it 并不和主句的主语一致）
Please come as soon as (it is) possible. 请尽快来。
注意：
由连词before 和after 引导的时间状语从句，如省略了主语和be 之后，before 和after 就
成了介词。
The old machine must be checked before it is used. 这台旧机器在使用前必须检查。
【误】The old machine must be checked before used. （动词的-ed 形式不可做介词的宾语）
【正】The old machine must be checked before being used.
He told me the truth after he was asked three times. 问了他三遍他才告诉我真相。
【误】He told me the truth after asked three times.
【正】He told me the truth after being asked three times.
②以as if, as though 等连词引导的方式状语从句
She lay there, as if (she was) dead. 她躺在那儿，好像死了。（省略的主语和主句的主语一
致）
He opened his lips as if (he were going) to say something. 他张开嘴唇，好像要说什么话似
的。
③以if, unless 等连词引导的条件状语从句
1
We shall start at eight, if (it is) convenient. 如果方便的话，我们八点钟出发。
Correct the mistakes in the following sentences, if (there are) any.
如果下面句子中有错，
请加以改正。
English words are easily forgotten unless (they are) constantly repeated.
英语单词不经常
重复是很容易忘记的。
④以even if, even though, though, although, whether 等连词引导的让步状语从句
Frost is possible, though (it is) not probable, even at the end of May.
甚至在五月底下霜也
是可能的，虽然可能性不太大。
Whether (it is) difficult or not, we will try our best to complete the task.
不管任务是否艰
巨，我们都要尽力去完成。
Whatever the cause (may be), the result is certain. 不论原因是什么，结果是确定的。
Though (he is) young, he knows a lot. 他虽然年轻但懂得很多。
提示：
在这类从句中，如果be 是助动词，后面跟着现在分词或过去分词，只要主语和从句中的
主语相同，也可以把从句中的主语和助动词be 省略掉。
He hurt his leg while (he was) riding a horse. 他在骑马时伤了腿。
When (you are) cycling, don't forget the traffic lights. 骑车时，不要忘记看红绿灯。
Once (it is) seen, it can never be forgotten. 一旦看见，就永远不会忘记。
If (it is) burnt, rubber can give off a poisonous gas. 橡胶如果燃烧起来，会发出有毒气体。
4 ．在比较从句中通常把和主句重复的部分省掉。
①省略谓语的全部
James enjoys the theatre more than Susan.
詹姆斯比苏姆更喜欢戏剧。（Susan 后省略了
enjoys the theatre）
Tom has as many books as Jack.
汤姆有跟杰克一样多的书。（Jack 后省略了has many
books）
②省略主语和谓语的一部分
Brown speaks French as fluently as English.
布朗说法语和英语一样流利。（as 后省略了
he speaks）
She was more angry than frightened.
与其说她害怕，倒不如说她生气。（than 后省略了
She was）
③省略表语部分
Mrs White is not so young as she looks.
怀特夫人没有看上去那样年轻。（looks 后省略了
young）
The situation is much more delicate than it seems.
情况要比表面上看起来微妙得多。
（seems 后省略了delicate）
④省略主语和谓语的大部分，保留状语
He is working harder than before.
他现在工作比过去努力多了。（than 后省略了he
worked hard）
There are as many students in our school as in their school.
我们学校的学生和他们学校
的学生一样多。（as 后省略了there are many students）
⑤省略主语
He drank a little more than was good for him. 他喝酒稍有一点过量。（than 后省略了it）
⑥省略宾语
1
You spent more money than I had expected. 你花掉的钱比我预料的多。（expected 后省略
了that you should spend）
I was able to borrow as many books as (what) I asked for. 我想要的许多书如数借到。
⑦省略从句的全部
You are getting slimmer. 你越来越苗条了。（slimmer 后省略了than you were before）
It is not only blind men who make such stupid mistakes. People who can see sometimes act
just as foolishly. 不仅仅只是瞎子才犯如此愚蠢的错误。有时候，眼睛看得见的人也做出同
样的蠢事。（foolishly 后省略了as blind men act）
注意：
在这类句子中，被省略的部分大多数是不表示出来的。如果把省略部分补上，反而不合
乎习惯。
He is taller than I am. 他比我高。（am 之后省略tall，补上不合习惯）
5 ．主句和从句中可同时省略一些成分。
The sooner (this is done), the better (it will be). 越快越好。
(If you take) No pains, (you will make) no gains. （谚）不劳则无获。
C． 使用替代词的省略
我们在省略句子某些成分时，有时还必须加上适当的替代词，如do, so, one 等，以保持
句子意思的完整。
1 ．do
do 用来代替动词或动词加其他成分。
I know you better than he does. 我比他更了解你。（he does 等于he knows you）
--- Have you finished your work
--- Yes, I did yesterday. （did 替代finished my work）
2 ．so
so 在expect, think, imagine, hope, suppose, believe 等词后面，代替单词、词组或句子。
She became a loyal friend to me and remains so.
她成了我的一个忠诚的朋友，而且一直
如此。（so 替代a loyal friend）
--- Has she ever been to London 她曾到过伦敦吗
--- I don't think so. 我想她没去过。（= I don't think she has been to
London.)
提示：
也可使用do so, do that 来代替动词加宾语。
He said he would make the bed for me but he didn't do so.
他说他帮我整理床铺的，但是
他没有这样做。（do so 代替make the bed for me）
They played cards after supper and I watched them do that.
他们晚饭后打牌，我在一旁
观看。（do that 代替play cards）
3 ．not
not 代替否定的句子，用法和so 相似。
--- Will it rain tomorrow 明天会下雨吗
--- I hope not. 我希望不会。（= I hope it won't rain tomorrow.）
1
--- Can you come next week 你下星期能来吗
--- I'm afraid not. 恐怕我不能来。(= I'm afraid that I can not come.)
4 ．the same
the same 可代替词组或从句。
The mother swept the floor and her child did the same.
母亲扫地, 孩子也跟着干。（the
same 代替swept the floor）
Kate ordered two fried eggs. I ordered the same.
凯特点了两个煎鸡蛋，我也点了同样的
菜。（the same 代替two fried eggs）
These oranges are just as sour as the last ones we had. They taste the same.
这些桔子和我
们上次吃的一样酸。他们味道一样。（the same 代替as sour as the last ones we had）
5 ．one
one 是不定代词，常用来代替可数名词。其复数形式是ones。
I haven't got any books; can you lend me one 我没有书，你能借我一本吗
The white dresses go with the hat better than the blue ones.
白色套装比蓝色套装更配这
顶帽子。
必背：
口语中常用的省略句。
Up to you ！你说了算！
Believe me. 相信我。
Give me a hand. 帮我一下。
Doesn't matter. 没关系。
Me too. 我也一样。
Not yet. 还没有。
Too bad! 太糟糕啦！
Mind you ！当心！
Where to 要去哪儿？
Sure, no problem. 当然，没问题。
That much 太贵了吧？
Get lost! 滚开！
So that explains it. 原来如此
Too strange to be true! 太奇怪了，不真实。
See what I mean
了解我的意思吗？
1
第十六章 主谓一致
主谓一致（concord），是指主语和谓语动词要保持人称和数上的一致。英语中动词be 的
变化形式最多，如I am，You are，He is，We are 等。主语I 一定要用am 的动词形式，这就
叫“主谓一致”。
一、 主谓一致的三个原则
主谓一致涉及三个基本原则，即语法一致原则（principle of grammatical concord）、意义
一致原则（principle of notional concord）和就近原则（principle of proximity）。
A. 语法一致
语法一致是指主语和谓语在单复数形式上的一致关系，主语为单数形式，谓语动词用单数
形式；反之，谓语动词用复数形式。
My child has no intention of spending a vacation with me. 我的孩子不想与我一起度假。
My children have no intention of spending a vacation with me.
我的孩子们不想与我一起度
假。
B. 意义一致
意义一致是说谓语动词的单、复数要取决于主语所表达的概念，而不取决于表面上的语法
标记。
1. 主语形式虽为单数，但意义为复数，谓语动词用复数。
The only people who are interested in the book seem to be lawyers.
唯一对这本书感兴趣的
人好像是律师。
The majority of primary school teachers are women. 大多数小学老师都是女的。
1
2. 主语形式为复数，而意义上却是单数，谓语动词用单数。
No news is good news.
没有消息就是好消息。
Billiards is becoming more and more popular in some cities.
桌球在一些城市里越来越受欢
迎。
C. 就近原则
就近原则是指当主语由两个或两个以上名词或代词组成时，谓语动词的数要与它紧邻的名
词或代词的数一致。
There is a square table and some chairs in the center of the dining-room.
餐厅中央有一张
方桌和几把椅子。
Either your students or William knows this. 不是你的学生就是威廉知道这件事。
注意：
一般说来，究竟何时采用何种原则，应视英语习惯用法而定。但在实际使用中，如果对上
述三种原则捉摸不定，遵循语法一致的原则是一种比较稳妥的方法。
二、 并列主语的主谓一致
A. 由and 连接的并列主语
1. 用and（或both... and）连接并列主语时，谓语动词通常用复数。
A hammer and a saw are useful tools. 榔头和锯子都是有用的工具。
Both industry and agriculture have been greatly developed these years.
这几年工农业大大
地发展了。
①当and 连接的两个名词是指组合到一起的一件完整的或成套的东西，或表示同一个人或
一种概念时，谓语动词要用单数形式。
The writer and teacher is speaking at the meeting. 这位教师兼作家正在会上发言。
A needle and thread was given to her, but she could not sew the button on.
针线给了她，但
她不会把钮扣缝起来。（a needle and thread 作为同一件东西对待）
Going to bed early and getting up early is a good habit. 早睡早起是个好习惯。
（going to bed
early and getting up early 被看成同一概念）
Bread and butter is his usual breakfast. 他经常以黄油面包当早餐。
A cart and horse was seen in the distance. 远方看见一辆马车。
必背：
英语中并列结构表示整体概念的有：
iron and steel 钢铁
law and order 治安
bread and butter 黄油面包
a watch and chain 一块带链的表
a knife and fork 刀叉
a coat and tie 配有领带的上衣
aim and end 目的
truth and honesty 真诚
1
2. 一个名词为几个并列形容词所修饰时，这时主语和谓语动词的一致关系一般遵循语法一
致的原则。
Clever and slow students are treated alike. 聪明的和迟钝的学生都受到相同的对待。
A black and white kitten was found in the garden yesterday.
昨天在花园里发现一只黑白色
的小花猫。
比较：
A black and a white dogs are playing in the yard.
一只黑狗和一只白狗正在院子里玩。（两
只狗）
A black and white dog is playing in the yard. 一只黑白花狗正在院子里玩。(一只狗)
3 ．在each... and each ..., every...and every..., no...and no... 等结构之后，谓语动词用单数形
式。
Each boy and each girl has an apple. 每个男孩和女孩都有苹果。
Every hour and every minute is precious. 每一小时，每一分钟，都很宝贵。
No bird and no beast is seen on the lonely island. 荒岛上既看不到鸟也看不到野兽。
4. 带有并列动词的what 从句作主语时，要根据意义一致的原则决定动词的数。
What he says and does do not agree. 他的言行不一致。（具体指他说的话和他做的事）
What he says and does does not concern me. 他的言行与我无关。（泛指他的为人）
5 ．在某些成语中，一些并列主语用and 相连时，其后谓语用单数形式。
All work and no play makes Jack a dull boy. 光工作不玩耍，聪明的孩子也会变傻。
Early to bed and early to rise makes a man healthy, wealthy and wise.
早睡早起使人健康、
富有、聪慧。
B. 以or, either...or, neither...nor, not...but, not only...but also 等连接的名词（代词）作并
列主语时，谓语动词的单复数应根据就近一致的原则。
Neither he nor I am willing to go shopping today. 他和我今天都不愿去购物。
--Are either you or he to go there -- 是你还是他将去那里？
--Neither is. -- 一个也不去。
Not only the Writer brothers but also their father was there.
不只是莱特兄弟在那里，连他
们的父亲也在。
Not the students but their teatrers but also their father was there.
被邀请去参加晚会的不是学生（们），而是他们的老师。
C．主语后跟有as well as, as much as, no less than, along with, like, rather than, together
with, besides, including, in addition to 等引导的词组时，其谓语动词的单、复数按主语的单、
复数而定，也就是说，谓语动词的数不受这些词组的影响。
The teacher as well as the students was reading in the library.
这位老师和学生们一起在图
书馆阅读。
The students as well as the teacher were reading in the library.
学生们和这位老师一起在图
书馆阅读。
The manager, rather than the workers, is responsible for the loss.
损失的责任应由经理而不
1
是工人们来承担。
Nobody but three policemen was on the spot. 当时只有三个警察在现场。
三、 单一主语的主谓一致
单数的主语跟单数的动词，复数的主语跟复数的动词，这是符合语法一致的原则。但在实
际运用中，往往会出现较为复杂的情况：
A． 形复意单的名词作主语
形复意单的名词作主语（即形式为复数，意义为单数），按意义一致的原则，用作单数意义
时，谓语用单数，反之，谓语用复数。
1. 许多学科名称，如mathematics, physics, economics, politics 等，以及news 等名词作主
语时，动词用单数。
Physics is required of every student in our school. 物理是我校每个学生的必修科目。
News is traveling fast nowadays. 当今新闻传播得很快。
2. 用作国名、组织机构、书名、报刊名等复数形式的专有名词作为整体对待，谓语用单数。
The United Nations has passed a resolution to lift sanctions against Iraq. 联合国通过了解除
对伊制裁的决定。
The Times reports the news of the strike. 时代杂志报导了罢工的消息。
Great Expectations was written by Dickens in 1860. 《远大前程》是狄更斯于1860 年写的。
注意：
如果山脉、群岛、瀑布等名称作主语时，谓语动词用复数。
The Great Lakes lie between the USA and Canada. 五大湖在美国和加拿大两国之间。
The Philippines are in the western Pacific Ocean southeast of China.
菲律宾群岛在中国东
南太平洋西部。
The Niagara Falls are the falls on the Niagara River. 尼亚加拉瀑布位于尼亚加拉河上。
3. 一些形复意单的名词，包括有成双成套部分的衣物或工具名称，作主语时，谓语用复数。
My blue trousers have been worn out. 我的蓝裤子已经穿破了。
His glasses are new. 他的眼镜是新的。
注意：
这些名词如用a pair of 修饰时，谓语动词用单数。
The shoes are under the bed. 鞋在床下。
The pair of shoes is under the bed. 这双鞋在床下。
4. 单、复数同形名词作主语时，按意义一致的原则，用作单数意义时，谓语用单数；用作
复数意义时，谓语用复数。这类名词有：sheep, deer, fish, means, works, species, Chinese,
Japanese 等。
The (This) glass works was set up in 1986. 这家玻璃厂建于1986 年。
The (These) glass works are near the railway station. 这些玻璃厂在火车站附近。
This species of rose is very rare. 这种玫瑰很稀有。
1
The species of fish are numerous. 鱼的种类很多。
Sheep are raised for wool. 养羊是为了剪毛。
There is a sheep under the tree. 树下有一只绵羊。
比较：
当这类名词前有a, such a, this, that, every
修饰时，谓语用单数；有all, such, these, those
修饰时，谓语用复数。
Every means has been tried out without much result. 每一种方法都试过了却没什么结果。
All means have been tried out without much result. 所有方法都试过了却没什么结果。
B． 集合名词作主语
集合名词表示有若干个体组成的集合体，如army, audience, class, club, company, crowd,
government, group, party, population, team, union 等。
1. 集合名词作主语时，若表示整体概念，谓语动词用单数，若表示构成该集合体的成员，
则谓语动词用复数。
His family are waiting for him. 他的家人正在等他。
But the man's family was small-only himself and his wife.
但那人的家庭很小，只有他本人
和妻子。
One third of the population here are workers. 这里人口中有三分之一是工人。
The population of the earth is increasing every year. 地球上的人口每年都在增长。
2. 有些集合名词，如cattle, folk, people, police, youth 等，作主语时，谓语动词用复数，即
所谓的“形单意复”。
The police have caught the thief. 警察已经抓住了小偷。
The cattle are grazing in the field. 牛在田野里吃草。
Youth today are quite different from 20 years ago. 现在的年轻人和20 年前大不一样。
Some folk are never satisfied. 有些人从不知足。
比较：
几组集合名词作主语的句子。
The team is well organized. 这个队组织得很好。
The team are all tough players. 这个队的队员都很强壮。
All the class were jumping with joy. 全班同学都高兴地跳了起来。
The class is made up of 54 students. 这班由54 名学生组成。
The young couple is happy. 这对年轻夫妇很幸福。
The young couple are quarrelling with each other. 这对年轻夫妇正在吵架。
The village is at the foot of the mountain. 这个村子在山脚下。
All the village are out to greet him. 全村人都出来欢迎他。
3 ．有些无生命（表示物）的集合名词作主语，谓语用单数。
All the furniture in my room is new. 我房间里的家具都是新的。
Warm clothing is necessary in cold climates. 在寒冷的气候中，保暖的衣服是必需的。
The machinery is driven by electricity. 这些机器是由电力驱动的。
Has your luggage arrived yet 你的行李已经运到了吗？
A lot of hiking equipment is needed here. 这里需要大量徒步旅行的装备。
1
C． 代词作主语
1 ．名词性物主代词作主语时，既可以用作单数，也可以用作复数，这取决于它所代替的是
单数还是复数。
Ours is a great country. 我们的（国家）是一个伟大的国家。(ours = our country)
Your shoes are black, and mine are brown. 你的鞋是黑色的，我的(鞋)是棕色的。( mine=my
shoes)
2 ．such, the same 等指示代词作主语时，应根据其所指的内容来决定单、复数。
Such was Albert Einstein, a simple man with great achievements. 爱因斯坦就是这样一个俭
朴而又取得巨大成就的人。
Such are her wishes. 她的愿望就这些。
3．关系代词who, that, which 等在定语从句中作主语时，其谓语动词的数应与主句中先行
词的数一致。
Those who want to go for a picnic please put up your hands. 那些想去野餐的人请举手。
Some of the energy that is used by man comes from the sun.
一些被人类使用的能量来自于
太阳
。
注意：
在 one of+复数名词+whothatwhich 引导的定语从句结构中，关系代词whothatwhich 的先
行词是靠近它的复数名词而不是one，因此，从句中的动词应该是复数形式。但当one 之前有
the, the only 等修饰语时，关系代词的先行词是one，而不是靠近它的复数名词，因此从句的
动词应是单数形式。
This is one of the best films that have been shown this year.
这是今年所放的最佳电影中的
一部。
She is the only one of the girls who sings best. 她是这么多女孩中唯一歌唱得最好的。
4 ．疑问代词who, what, which 作主语时，谓语动词可根据说话人所要表达的意思决定单、
复数。
Who lives upstairs It is Xiao Wang. 谁住在楼上？小王。
Who live next door It is Li and Zhang. 谁住在隔壁？李和张。
5．不定代词作主语时，有以下两种情况：
①some, all, any, none, more, most 等词可以指复数名词和不可数名词，它们作主语时，视其
文中的意义，判断动词用单数还是复数的形式。
Now all has been changed. 一切都已改变。
All are present today, Mr Li. answered the monitor. 班长回答说：李老师，今天大家全到了。
None is so good as he. 没有人像他那么好。
None are so good as those who are always ready to help others.
没有人像那些总是乐于助人
的人那么好。
提示：
在口语中，none of + 复数名词作主语，谓语动词用单数或复数均可，要以说话人所想的而
定。
1
None of the telephones workswork. 这些电话都坏了。
None of us havehas been to Dalian. 我们中谁也没去过大连。
②some, all, any, none, more, most 等词接of 时，若of 的宾语为不可数名词，动词用单数形
式，若of 的宾语为复数名词或代词时，动词用复数形式。
Most of his spare time was spent in reading. 他的大部分业余时间都花在读书上了。
Most of the colour blind people are men. 色盲的人大多数是男的。
D． 数词、量词作主语
1. 数词作主语，不论指人还是指物，谓语通常用复数。
About twenty know the secret. 二十人知道这个秘密。
Six are missing. 丢了六个。
2. “more than one + 单数名词”结构作主语，尽管从意义上看是复数，但它的谓语动词用
单数形式。但“more+复数名词+than one”结构作主语时，谓语动词用复数形式。
More than one person has known the news. 不止一个人知道了这个消息。
More students than one are for your proposal. 很多学生同意你的计划。
3. one out of ten 或one in ten 结构作主语，谓语动词应按照语法一致的原则，用单数。
One out of ten was badly injured in the accident. 在这场事故中有十分之一的人受了伤。
4. “a +单数名词 + or two” 结构作主语，谓语动词用单数形式。但“one or two +复数名
词”结构作主语，谓语动词用复数形式。
A word or two is missing here. 这里缺一两个词。
One or two friends are coming for dinner this evening. 一两个朋友今晚要来吃晚饭。
5. “many a + 单数名词”结构作主语，谓语动词需用单数形式。
Many a passenger was killed in the accident. 许多乘客在这一次事故中丧生。
Many a boy has been to the castle. 有好几个男孩到过那城堡。
6. “one and a half + 复数名词”结构作主语，谓语动词需用单数形式。
One and a half bananas is left on the table. 桌上还剩下一根半香蕉。
One and a half years has passed. 一年半时间过去了。
7. “分数或百分数+ of + 名词”结构作主语，其谓语动词要与短语中of 后面的名词的数保
持一致。
Three-fourths of its surface of the earth is sea. 地球表面四分之三是海洋。
Two-thirds of the people present are against the plan. 在场的三分之二的人反对这个计划。
Around 10 percent of the forest is destroyed each year. 每年大约有百分之十的森林被毁。
8. 用plusand 表示“加”，用minus 表示“减”，和用times 表示“乘”时，动词多用单数，
但也可用复数。
Two and two isare four. 二加二是四。
Ten times five isare fifty. 十乘五等于五十。
注意：
1
用from 表示“被减”，multiplied by 表示“被乘”或divided by 表示“被除”，其谓语动词
用单数。
8 from 10 leaves 2. 10 减8 等于2。
25 divided by 5 equals 5. 25 除以5 等于5。
9. 时间价格距离等作为整体看待时，谓语动词用单数形式。
Fifty kilometers is a long distance. 五十公里是一段长距离。
Four thousand dollars is more than she can afford. 她付不起4，000 美元。
The six months was a terrible dream for her. 那6 个月对她来说是一场恶梦。
Only six days was allowed to make preparations for the final examination.
只给了六天的时
间来准备期末考试。
注意：
若强调这类结构的复数意义，谓语动词也可用复数形式。
Six years have passed since my father left home. 我父亲离家已经六年了。
The fifty miles were covered by the winner in three hours.
优胜者花了三小时跑完了50 英
里的路程。
There are eight silver dollars in the drawer. 抽屉里有八块银元。
10.“a lot of, lots of, plenty of, a heap of, a mass of, half of +名词”构成的短语作主语时，其
谓语动词要与短语中of 后面的名词的数保持一致，这是因为of 后面的名词是中心词，而of
前面的量词是修饰语。
Lots of damage was caused by fire. 许多损失由火灾引起的。
Lots of goods were sent there by air. 大量的货物空运到那里。
Half of the oranges are bad. 一半的桔子烂了。
Half of the food is unfit to eat. 这食物中有一半不能吃。
11. 在“a numbertotal of+名词复数”结构中，中心词是名词，谓语动词用复数形式。但在
“the numbertotal of+ 名词复数”结构中，中心词却是number 或total，故谓语动词用单数
形式。
A number of students are playing basketball on the playground.
操场上有相当多的学生在
打篮球。
The number of pages in this book is 900. 这本书的页数是900。
A total of 3 ，000 letters were received last month. 上个月共收到3，000 封信。
The total of letters received last month was 3 ，000. 上个月收到信件共3，000 封。
12. 在“a great deal of a large amount of + 不可数名词”结构作主语时，谓语动词通常用
单数。但“large amounts of + 不可数名词”结构作主语，谓语动词通常用复数。
A great deal of rice was taken from the country to the city by railway.
很多大米通过铁路从
乡下运往城市。
A large amount of money is spent on the project. 这个工程耗费了巨额资金。
Large amounts of money were spent on the free way. 建高速公路花了大量的钱。
13. “the rest of + 可数名词或不可数名词”结构作主语，其谓语动词要与短语中of 后面的
名词的数保持一致。
1
The rest of the students are watering trees. 其余的学生正在浇树。
The rest of the wine has gone bad. 剩下的酒已经变质了。
四、 其他情况的主谓一致
A． 名词性从句和非谓语动词作主语
不定式短语、动词的-ing 形式和名词性从句作主语，谓语动词用单数形式。
Doing experiments is a good way to find out answers to questions.
做实验是找到问题答案
的好方法。
To learn foreign languages is not so difficult as you think.
学一门外语并不像你想象的那么
难。
That I shall work with you is a great pleasure. 我能和你在一起工作是极大的快乐。
注意：
what 引导的主语从句，谓语动词通常用单数，但所指的具体内容是复数意义时，谓语动词
可用复数形式。
What we want is more time. 我们需要的是更多的时间。
What they need in that area are doctors and nurses. 他们那个地区需要的是医务工作者。
What she left him are some old photos. 她给他留下的是一些旧照片。
B． 名词化的形容词作主语
名词化的形容词指的是“the＋形容词（或过去分词或现在分词）”结构，如：the brave, the
poor, the rich, the blind, the young, the old, the sick, the wounded, the injured, the unemployed,
the dying, the living 等。当这种结构作主语，表示一类人时，谓语动词常用复数形式；但也
有少数的形容词或过去分词与定冠词连用指个别的或表示抽象的概念时，谓语动词则用单数。
The young are more active than the old in the work. 做这项工作青年人比老年人积极。
The injured in the accident is an engineer. 在这次事故中受伤的那人是位工程师。
The beautiful is loved by all. 爱美之心人皆有之。
必背：
下列词属于表示抽象的概念，谓语动词需用单数。
the latest 最新情况
the unknown 未知的事
the rough 难处理的事
the worst 最坏的事
the foreign 外国的事情
the unreal 不真实的事
the lovely 漂亮的东西
the evil 恶
the ugly 丑
the mystical 神秘的东西
the true 真
the false 假
1
C． 倒装句
倒装句的谓语动词的单复数应根据主语而定。
On the wall were several famous paintings. 墙上悬挂着几幅著名油画。
East of the city lie two chemical works. 城东有两家化工厂。
Between the two buildings stands a monument. 两幢楼之间耸立着一块纪念碑。
